Cadillac 1998 Eldorado Owners Manual Owner's

2015-10-23

: Cadillac Cadillac-1998-Cadillac-Eldorado-Owners-Manual-812926 cadillac-1998-cadillac-eldorado-owners-manual-812926 cadillac pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 380

DownloadCadillac Cadillac-1998-Cadillac-Eldorado-Owners-Manual- Owner's Manual  Cadillac-1998-cadillac-eldorado-owners-manual
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
REPRODUCTION

r
P
I

.

.

.. .

.

: .

.

r"a
t

I

1-1

Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the "SIR" system.

2- 1

Features and Controls
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.

3- 1

Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.

4-1

Your Driving and the Road
Here you'll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions.

5- 1

Problems on the Road
This section tells what to do if you have a problem while driving. such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc.

6-1

Service and Appearance Care
Here the nlanual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.

7-1

Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you how to contact Cadillac for assistance and how to get service and owner publications.
It also gives you information on "Reporting Safety Defects" on page 7- 12.

8- 1

Index
Here's an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.

i

We support voluntary
technician certification.
CERTIFIED

GENERAL MOTORS. GM and the GM Emblem.
CADILLAC, the CADILLAC Emblem and the name
ELDORADO are registered trademarks of General
Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the
product after that time without further notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor
Car Division whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you‘re o n the road. If you
sell the vehicle. please leave this manual in i t so the new
owner can use it.

WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION THROUGH
Nmona! 1ns:l:uta fr,r

AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE

Aux proprietaires canadiens:Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guideen franpis chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1500 Bonhill Rd.
Mississauga. Ontario L5T 1C7

Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25665433 A First Edition

ii

‘~“Copyripht
General Motors Corporation 1997
All Rights Reserved

The
PENALTY OF LEADERSHIP

adillac Motor CarCo. Detroit, Mich
I H I S TEXT APPEARED AS AN ADVERTISEMENT IN THE YATURD.4Y EVENING POST? J h N l i . \ R Y 2ND. IN THE YE,\R 1‘915

COPYRIGHT, CADILI..4C XlGTOR CAR DIVISION

Henry M. Leland,
founder of
Cadilluc, stands
beside the 1905
“Osceola” which
was built to
evaluate the
feasibility of a
closed bodied car.

Few automobiles are fortunate enough
to have the rich heritage
that is Cadillac. The name Cadillac is appropriately that of
Antoine deLa Mothe Cadillac, the French military commander
who founded the cityof Detroit in 1701. What better namefor
the oldest automobile manufacturerin Detroit.

Henry M. Leland, known as the master of precision,
initiated his precision manufacturing techniques at the
founding of Cadillac in 1902. His exacting standards
prompted the motto by which Cadillac has beenguided
over the wars - "Craftsmanship A Creed - Accuracy
X Law.''
The introduction of the first four cylinder enginein 1905
led the industry and enabled Cadillacs to travel at speeds
up to 50 mph.
For attention to quality and innovation, the Royal
Automobile Club of England awarded the prestigious
Dewar Trophy to Cadillac twice . . . first in 1908 for
achieving perfect interchangeabilityof parts and again
for introducing the electricself starter, electric lighting
and ignition system on 1912 models. Cadillacis the
only American manufacturer to win this honor and
the only manufacturer in the world to win it twice. As

commonplace as standardized partsare today, in 1908
parts were still individually hand fitted both in
production and service.

1914 V8 Engine

1949 Overhead
Valve High
Compression
V8 Engine

VI 4 Engines
1930-1940

Standardization opened the eyes of the industrial world
and was the cornerstone of modem assembly line
production. From this achievement evolved the
reference to Cadillac as“Standard of the World.”
In 1909 Cadillac was purchased by the then new
General Motors Corporation.
Convenience, cleanliness and all-weather comfort were
greatly enhanced in 1910 when Cadillac became the first
manufacturer to offer closed bodies as standard equipment.
“The Penaltyof Leadership” first appeared inthe
January 2, 1915 issue of The Saturday Evening Postas an
expression of the Cadillac commitment to leadership,
quality and innovation. Itis widely regarded as one of the

finest documents ever written. It was published following
the introduction of the first production V8 engine,
which was standard in all Cadillacs beginning with the
1915 model.
Many Cadillac “firsts” have followed over the years,
inciuding the synchro-mech clashless transmission, a
nationwide comprehensive service policy. security plate
glass. chrome platingand the first car to be designed by
a stylist ( 1927 LaSalle/Harley Earl).The ’30s witnessed
production of the powerful, smooth and quiet V12 and
V16 engines. The crisp, contemporary lines of the 1938
60 Special series ushered in a new era in styling.

VI 6 Engin e
During World War 11, shortly after PearlHarbor.
Cadillac discontinued car productionfor the first time
since 1902 in order to construct light tanks,combat
vehicles and internal parts for Allison V17 10 engines.
Two Cadillac V8 engines and Hydra-Matic
transmissions were used in each M5AI and M24 tanks.
1931 V I 6 Sport Phaeton

There are, to be sure, many ways to describe the
superlative motor car pictured. "Beauty,"
"majesty,""brilliance"

-allapply,in

their

fullest meaning, to this new Cadillac. And yet,
from this wonderful vocabulary, we
have
selected "elegance" as the word that most fully
characterizes the Cadillac of 1960. The car's
beautiful, clean-lined styling is certainly elegant
beyond compare. Its new interior luxury
provides a feeling of elegance that can be sensed
nowhere else in the world of motor cars. And
even its new performance - smooth, quiet and
effortless - might be summarized
as "elegance
in motion.''Once you have seen and driven it for
yourself, we think you will agree that the word is
"elegance" - and that the car is Cadillac!
C.WILLAC MOTOR CAR DMSION. GENEFCL MOTOFS COFS'OMON

advances such as air suspension. memory seat,
automatic electricdoor locks, transistor radio. a brushed
stainless steel roof and low profile tires.

For the 1948 model. Cadillac introduced the legendary
tail fin which once more set the trend in automotive
styling for nearly two decades. This was closely
followed with the two door hardtop Coupe DeVille and
the industry’s first modem overhead valve, high
compression V8 engine on the 1949 model.
Engineering innovations. conveniences and styling
dominated the ’50s and ‘60s. Cruise control, automatic
climate control. tilt and telescoping steering wheels,
twilight sentinel and four door hard tops all debuted in
these years. In 1957 the Eldorado Brougham featured

The Eldorado. introduced in 1953, wziS redesigned for
1967 as the first front wheel drive personal luxury car.
The 472 cu. in. V8.engineused in all Cadiilacs in 1968
and 1969 was enlarged to SO0 cu. in. for all 1970
through 1976 Eldorados. The Track Master
computerized skid control braking system option
debuted on 1970 Eldorados.
A driver and passenger Air Cushion Restraint
system (air bag) was available on ali 1974. 1975 and
1976 Cadillacs.
Analog Electronic Fuel Injection was available. on
1975 Cadillacs and standard on the new international
size 1976 Seville. In 1978. the Trip Computet. option
incorporated the first on-board microprocessor.

The electronics and computerization which were
pioneered by Cadillac in the ’70s came of age in the
’80s with Digital Fuel Injection and On-Board
Diagnostics in 1980. four wheel Anti-lock Brakes on
1986 models and Traction Control in the fdl of 1989.
The 1992 Seville STS was the first car ever towin all
three major automotive awards: Car of the Year, Motor
Trend; Ten Best List, Car & Driver; Car of the Year.
Automobile Magazine.
The year 1993 saw the introduction of the Northstar
system. The stateof the art system includes the 32 valve,
dual overhead camshaft, Northstar4.6 liter V8 engine,
4T80-E electronically controlled automatic transaxle,
road sensing suspension, speed sensitive steering.
anti-lock brakes and traction control.

For more than nine decades Cadillac has been a leader in
quality and technical innovation. Now more than ever,
Cadillac is “Creating a Higher Standard.”

Many people read their owner's manual from beginning
to end when they first receivetheir new vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for yourvehicle. In this manual. you'll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.

A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It's an alphabetical list of what's in
the manual, and the page number where you'll find it.

ngs and

sv
e. .I

You will find a number of safety cautionsin this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.

These mean thereis something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area. we tell you what the hazard is. Then
we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don't. you or
others could be hurt.
You w i l l also find a circle
with ;1 slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means "Don't,''
"Don't do this" or "Don't
let this happen."

Also, in this bookyou will find thesenotices:

NOTICE:
These mean there is something that
could
damage your vehicle.

In the notice area, we tell you about something that can
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
not be covered by your warranty, andit could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warningsin different colors orin
different words.
You'll also seewarning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION orNOTICE.

xii

For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY

A

These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:

DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK

PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
CAUSTIC
BAlTERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS

These symbols
have to do with
your lamps:

These symbols
are on some of
your controls:

These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:

WINDSHIELD
WIPER

TURN
SIGNALS

COOLANT
TEMP

e

BAlTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER

FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS

COOLANT

ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE

,\I/,
FOG LAMPS

#0

I-1

FUSE

t
LIGHTER

(0) tcr
HORN

BRAKE

WINDOW
DEFOGGER

SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BAllERY

--

Here are some
other symbols
you may see:

ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES

a cr
e,
SPEAKER

FUEL

(@)

p3

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about theseats in your Cadillac and how t o use your safety belts properly. You can also
learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.

1- 2
1- 6
1- 11
1- 12
1- 12
1- 19
1- 20
1 - 20

Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re forEveryone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Supplemental Inflatable
Restraint (SIR) System

1- 26

I - 29
I - 30
1- 33
1- 45
1- 48
1- 48
1- 48

Rear Seat Passengers
Center Passenger Position
Children
Child Restraints
Larger Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Repiacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash

1-1

Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the power seats -- how to
adjust them, and also about the reclining front seatbacks.
memory seats, lumbar adjustments, head restraints,
heated seats and seatback latches.

The power seat controls are locatedon the outboard side
of the front seat cushion.
Move the front of the control in the direction of the
arrows to adjust the front portion of the cushion up
or down.
Move the rear of the control in the direction of the
arrows to adjust the rear portion of the cushion up
or down.

Power Seats
0

Lift up or push down on both outer arrows at the
same time to move the entire seat up or down.
To move the whole seat forward or rearward, slide
the control in the direction of the center arrow.

1-2

Power Lumbar Control (If Equipped)

I

I

The lumbar control is
located on the outboard side
of each front seat.It
provides additional support
to your lower back and it
works independently of the
other seat controls. Use the
power seat control first to
get the proper position.
Then proceed with the
lumbar adjustment.

To reshape the lower seatback, press the lumbar control
forward to increase supportand rearward to decrease
support. Press the control up or down to raise or lower
the support mechanism.

Memory Seat and Mirrors (If Equipped)
Automatic seat and mirror movement will occur if the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to
enter the vehicle. The numberon the back of the
transmitter corresponds tothe 1 or 2 seat and mirror
position. Afterthe unlock button is pressed on the RKE
transmitter (the ignitionmust be in LOCK) or when the
key is placed in the ignition, the seatand mirrors will
automatically adjustto the appropriate position.
Automatic seat and mirror movement is programmed
through the Driver Information Center(DIC) so that the
driver can select whether or not movement will occur
using the RKE transmitter or by placing the ignition
key in the ignition. For programming information, see
“Pragrammable, Memory and Personalization Features”
in the Index.

Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as it
may during long trips,so should the position of your
lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
If you have the optional personalization package,the
power lumbar controlcan be programmed for memory
recall. For more information. see “Programmable,
Memory and Personalization Features” in the Index.

1-3

Heated Front Seat (Option)
The control is located in the
center console. Move the
switch to LO or HI to turn
on the heating elements in
the seat. The LO setting
warms the seatback and
cushion until the seat
approximates body
temperature. The HI setting
heats the seat toa slightly
higher temperature.

A telltale light in the control reminds you that the
heating system is in use. The heated seats can only be
used when the ignition is turned on.

1-4

Reclining Front Seatbacks
Press the control forward
or rearward to adjust
the seatback.

A CAUTION:

L
But don’t have a seatback reclinedif your vehicle
is moving.

,
~

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicleis
in motion can be dangerous. Even
if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do their
job when
you’re reclined like this.
its job. In a crash you
The shoulder belt can’t do
could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.
The lapbelt can’t do its job
either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, notat yourpelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.

Head Restraints
Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the
restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
The head restraints tilt forward and rearward also.

1 -5

The seatback may not fold without some help fromyou
if your vehicle is parked going down a fairly steep hill.
In this case, push the seatback toward the rear as you lift
the latch. Then the seatback will fold forward. Thelatch
must be down for the seat to work properly.

Seatback Latches

I A CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.

The front seatback folds
forward to let people get
into the rear seat. The
seatback will move back
and forth freely unless you
come to a sudden stop, then
it will lock into place.

1-6

Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
(SIR), or air bag system.

A CAUTION:
Don’t let anyoneride where he or she can’t wear
a safety belt properly.If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearinga safety belt,your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not beif you are buckled up. Alwaysfasten your
safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properly too.

In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.

A CAUTION:
It is extremelydangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in theseareas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow peopleto
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.

You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!

Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a reminder
to buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.)

1-7

Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.

i

kTake the simplest vehicle. Suppose it's just a seat
on wheels.

1-8

I

Put someone on it.

.;::;-*

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn't stop.

The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...

1-9

or the instrument panel ...

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That's why
safety belts make such good sense.

1-10

Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
Q; Won’t I be trapped in the vehicleafter an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?

A:

You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.

Q;

If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?

A:

Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only;so they work with
safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehiclethat has air
bags. you still have to buckleup to get the most
protection. That’s truenot only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.

If I’m a good driver, andI never drivefar from
home, why should I wear safety belts?

A:

You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn‘t your fault -- you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occurwithin 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 k m / h ) .
Safety belts are for everyone.

1-11

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see the part of this manual
called “Children.”Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.

Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.

Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear
it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how. see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can sit up straight.

1-12

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough. see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety beltlocks if there’s a sudden stop or crash.

1-13

Shoulder Belt Tightness Adjustment
Your car has a shoulder belt tightness
adjustment
feature. If the shoulder belt seems too tight, adjustit
before you begin to drive.

4. Let the belt go back all the way. You should hear a
slight clicking sound. If you don't, the adjustment
feature won't set, and you'll have to start again.
c

1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Start pulling the shoulder belt out.

A

A

A

A
A

5 . Now you can add a small amount of slack. Lean
forward slightly, then sit back. If you've added more
than 1 inch (25 mm) of slack, pull the shoulder belt
out as you did before and start again.

3. Just before it reaches the end, give it a quick pull.

1-14

If you move around in the vehicle enough, pull out the
shoulder belt. or open your door, the belt will become
tight again. If this happens, you can reset it.

What’s wrong with this?

A CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt
if your shoulder beltis
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should
fit against your body. Don’t
allow more than1 inch (25 mm) of slack.

f

F

f

A:

The shoulder beltis too loose.It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.

1-15

@

What’s wrong withthis?

A CAUTION:
You can be seriouslyinjured if your beltis
buckled in the wrong place like this.In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forceswould bethere, not at the pelvic
bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into thebuckle
nearest you.

A:

The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

1-16

f

What's wrong withthis?

A CAUTION:

F

You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move toofar forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force the
to
ribs, which aren't as strong shoulder
as
bones.
You could also severelyinjure internalorgans
like yourliver or spleen.

r
p

f
i
r

b

A:

The shoulder beltis worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-17

@

What’s wrong with this?

A CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the
belt to spread impact forces.If a belt is twisted,
make it straight so it can work properly, or ask
your dealer to fix it.

A:

The belt is twisted across the body.

1-18

F

I

Safety BeltUse During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.

p“

r
I

I

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
P

Before you close thedoor, be sure the belt is outof the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman shouldwear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

F

1-19

The best way to protect the fetus is to protectthe
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.

Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
safety belt properly, see “Driver Position” earlier in
this section.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same

way as the driver’s safety belt -- except for one thing.
If you ever pull the lap portionof the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
If this happens, just let the belt go
back all the way and
start again.

Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
(SIR) System
This part explains the Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
(SIR) system or air bag system.
Your vehicle has two air bags -- one airbag for the
driver and another air bag for the right frontpassenger.

1-20

Here are the most important things to know about the air
bag system:

A CAUTION:
You can be severelyinjured or killed in acrash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety beltduring a
crash helps reduceyour chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejectedfrom it. Air
bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety
belts. All air bags are designed to work with
safety belts, but don’t replace them. Air bagsare
designed to work only in moderate to severe
crashes where the front of your vehicle hits
something. Theyaren’t designed toinflate at all
in rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal
crashes. Everyone inyour vehicle should wear a
safety belt properly whether or not there’san
air bag for thatperson.

--

--

r
r
!

r

A CAUTION:
Air bagsinflate with great force, faster than the
an inflating
blink of an eye. If you’re too close to
air bag, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts
help keepyou in position beforeand duringa
air
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
bags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

r

A CAUTION:

r
r

Children who are up against, or very close to,an
air bag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured
or killed. Air bags pluslap-shoulder belts offer
the best protectionfor adults and
older children,
but not for young childrenand infants. Neither
CAUTION: (Continued)

\

ft
i

CAUTION: (Continued)
the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its air bag
system is designed for them. Young children and
infants need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle.To read how, see the
part of this manual called “Children”and see the
caution labelson the sunvisors and the right front
passenger’s safety belt.

There is anair bag
readiness lighton the
instrument panel, which
shows AlR BAG.

The system checksthe air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you
if there isan electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light”in the Index
for more information.

1-21

HOW

the Air Bag System Works

I

1

w..

. .

The right front passenger's airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger's side.

Where arethe air bags?
The driver's air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.

1-22

1A

CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and an air
or it
bag, the bag might not inflate properly
might force the object into that person. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Don’t
put anything between an occupant and an air
bag, anddon’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or
on or near any other air
bag covering.
~~

When shouldan airbag inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crash. The air
bag will inflate
only if the impact speed is above thesystem’s designed
“threshold level.”If your vehicle goes straight into a
wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level
is
about 9 to 15 mph (14 to 24 kmk). The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that

it can besomewhat above or below this range. If your
vehicle strikes something that will move or deform,such
as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The
air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers. side
impacts orrear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicleor because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and
how quickly the vehicle slows downin frontal or
near-frontal impacts.

What makes anair bag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detectsthat the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. Theinflator, air bag and related
hardware are all part of the air bag modules insidethe
steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the
right frontpassenger.

1-23

How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal cobsions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheelor the
instrument panel.Air bags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute theforce of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags
would
not help you in many types of collisions, including
rollovers, rear impacts andside impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward those air bags.
Air
bags should never be regardedas anything more than a
supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to
severe frontalor near-frontal collisions.

What will you see after an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates,so quickly that
some people may not even realize the
air bag inflated.
Some components of the air bag module -- the steering
wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the instrument panel
for the right front passenger’s bag -- will be hot for a short
time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be
some smoke and dust comingfrom vents in the deflated
air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent thedriver from
seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle,nor does it
stop peoplefrom leaving the vehicle.

1-24

A CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, thereis dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problemsfor
people with a history
of asthma or other
breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon
as it is safe to doso.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out
of the vehicle after an
air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
Your vehicle has a feapre that will automatically unlock
the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the air
bags inflate (ifbattery power is available). You can lock
the doors again and turn the interior lamps off by using
the door lock and interior lamp controls.
In many crashes severeenough to inflate an air bag,
windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.

0

0

0

Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they
inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag
system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system
won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.
A new system will include air bag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module, which records information about
the air bag system. The modulerecords information
about the readinessof the system. when the
sensors are activated and driver’s safety belt usage
at deployment.
Let only qualified technicianswork on your air
bag system. Improper service can mean that your
air bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer
for service.

NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s air
bag, it may not work properly.
You may have to
replace the air bag module.Do not open or break
the air bag covering.

Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are partsof the air bag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to
inflate while someone is worlung on your vehicle.
Your dealer and the Cadillac Service Manual have
information about servicingyour vehicle and the air bag
system. To purchase a service manual, see “Service and
Owner Publications”in the Index.

IA

CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignitionkey is
an air
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
bag can still inflate during improper
service. You
can be injuredif you are close to an airbag when
it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are
Be sure to
probably partof the air bag system.
follow proper service procedures, and make sure
the person performing work for you
is qualified
to do so.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.

1-25

Rear Seat Passengers

Lap-Shoulder Belt

It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.

The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.

Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions

I . Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

1-26

If the belt stops before it reaches thebuckle. tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.

If the belt is not long enough, see“Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the
release button on the buckle is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if
you ever had to.

1-27

/--\

/-l

II A CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurtif your shoulder beltis
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

t

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. Ln a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.The shoulder belt shouldgo
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

I

Center PassengerPosition

Lap Belt

When you sit in the center seating position,you have a
lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt
longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along thebelt.

1-29

Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult size. Neither
the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler
changes the need, for everyone,to use safety restraints.
In fact. the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says childrenup to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.

Smaller Children and Babies

I A CAUTION:
To make the belt shorter, pull its freeend as shown until
the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.If the belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender’’ at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.

1-30

Children who are up against, or very close to,an
air bag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protectionfor adults and older children,
but not for young children and infants. Neither
the vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its air bag
system is designedfor them. Young children and
infants need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle.

I
f

r
s
r

r

I A CAUTION:
Smaller children and babies should always be
restrained in a child or infant restraint. The
instructions for the restraintwill say whether it is
the righttype and size for your child. A very
young child’ship bones are so small that a
regular belt might not staylow on the hips, as it
should. Instead, the belt will likely be overthe
child’s abdomen.In a crash, the belt would apply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause seriousor fatal injuries. So, be sure that
any child smallenough for one is always properly
restrained in a child or infant restraint.

Infants need complete support, including support for
the head and neck.
This is necessary because an infant’s
neck is weak andits head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing restraint settles into the restraint,
so the
crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part
of the infant’s body, the back and shoulders.
A baby
should be securedin an appropriate infant restraint.
This is so important that many hospitals today won’t
release a newborn infant to its parents unless isthere
an infant restraint available for the baby’s firstintrip
a
motor vehicle.

1-31

I

CAUTION: (Continued)
at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-1b. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on
your arms. The baby
would be almost impossible
to hold.
Secure the babyin an infant restraint.

A CAUTION:
Never hold a baby in your arms
while riding in a
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a
crash. During a crash a baby will become so
heavy you can’t hold it. For example,
in a crash
CAUTION: (Continued)

--

1-32

I

Child Restraints
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have protection provided by
appropriate restraints.

Q:

What are the different types ofadd-on
child restraints?

A:

Add-on child restraints are available in four basic
types. When selecting a child restraint, take into
consideration not only the child’s weight and size.
but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.

An infant car bed (A) is a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle. It’s an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface.With an infant car bed,
make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the
center of the vehicle.

1-33

Y X

A rear-facing infant restraint (B) positions an infant
to face the rear of the vehcle. Rear-facing infant
restraints are designed for infantsof up to about
20 lbs. (9 kg) and about one yearof age. This type of
restraint faces the rearso that the infant's head. neck
and body can have the support they need in a crash.
Some &ant seats come in two parts -- the base stays
secured in the vehicle and the seat part is removable.

1-34

A forward-facing child restraint(C-E) positions a
child upright to face forward in the vehicle. These
forward-facing restraints are designed tohelp protect
children who are from 20 to 40 Ibs. (9 to 18 kg) and
about 26 to 40 inches (66 to 102 cm) in height, or up
to around four years of age. One type, a convertible
restraint. is designed to be used either as a rear-facing
infant seat or a forward-facing child seat.

1-35

A booster seat (F,G ) is designed for children whoare
abut 40 to 60 lbs. (18 to 27 kg) and about four to
fit of
eight years of age. It's designed to improve the
the vehicle's safetybelt system. Booster seatswith
shields use lap-only belts; however, booster seats
without shields use lap-shoulder belts. Booster seats
can also help a child to see out the window.

1-36

When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is. it
will have a label saying that it meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructionson the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use thebelt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
The instructions that come with the infant or child
restraint will show you how to do that. Both the owner’s
manual and the child restraint instructions are important,
so if either one of these is not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.

Where toPut the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.We at
General Motors therefore recommend that you put your
child restraint in the rear seat.Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here‘s why:

A CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured if the right front passenger’s air
bag inflates. Thisis because the backof a
rear-facing child restraint would be very
close to
the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat.
You may, however, secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat. Before
you secure
a forward-facing child restraint, alwaysmove the
front passenger seatas far back as itwill go. Or,
secure the child restraint in the rear seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.

1-37

Top Strap

If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be
anchored. If you need to have an anchor installed, you
can ask your Cadillac dealerto put it in for you. If you
want to install an anchor yourself. your dealer can tell
you how to do it.
Canadian law requires that child restraints have a top
strap, and that the strap be anchored.
If your child restraint has a top strap,your dealer can
obtain a kit with anchor hardware and installation
instructions specifically designed for thisvehicle. The
dealer can then install the anchor for you. In Canada,
this work will be done for you free of charge. Or. you
may install the anchor yourself using the instructions
provided in the kit.

1-38

r

if

Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
n

You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the childin the childrestraint when and
as the instructions say.

1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latchplate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.

If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face
or neck, put it behind the child restraint.

r
I

1-39

I

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is

positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-40

4. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while
you push down on the child restraint. If you're using
a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint. just unbuckle the vehicle's
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Rear Seat Position

You’ll be using the lap belt. Be sure to follow the
instructions that camewith the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
See the earlier part aboutthe top strap if the child
restraint has one.

I . Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.

3 . Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show
you how.

1-41

L

5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you pugh
down on the child restraint. If you’re using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure,

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger
child passenger.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able tounbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-42

r
P

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight
Front Seat Position

You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that camewith the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.

1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air
bag, always move the seat as far back as it will go
before securing a forward-facing-child
restraint.
(See “Seats”in the Index.)

r
P

Your vehicle has a right front passenger bag.
air Never
put a rea‘r-facing child restraint in this seat.. Here’s why:

I A CAUTION:

2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or
around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions
will show you how.

If the shoulder beltgoes in frontof the child’s face
or neck, put it behind the child restraint.

A child in arearfacing child restraintcan be
seriously injuredif the right front passenger’s air
bag inflates.This is because theback of a
rearfacing child restraint would be very close to
the inflating air bag.Always secure arearfacing
child restraintin the rearseat.

1-43

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-44

5. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock.

Larger Children

F

6. To tighten the belt, feed the lapbelt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
You may find it helpful to use your knee to push
down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7 . Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions tobe sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle's
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.

Children who have outgrown child restraints should
wear the vehicle's safety belts.
If you have the choice, achild should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulderbelt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.

1-45

Accident statistics showthat children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.But they need to use the
safety belts properly.
0

Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out
in a crash.

0

Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other
people who are.

A CAUTION:
Never dothis.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The
In a
belt can’t properly spread the impact forces.
crash, the two children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must be usedby
only one persona t a time.

&.’ What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the childis so small that the shoulder belt is
or neck?
very close to the child’s face

A:

1-46

Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide. If the
child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very
close to the child’s face or neck,you might want to
place the child in the center seat position. the one
that has only a lap belt.

_ I A CAUTION:
A

Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has
a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part
is behind
the child. If the child wears the belt in this
way, in
a crash the child might slide under the belt. The
belt’s force would thenbe applied right on the
or
child’s abdomen. That could cause serious
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits. the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips. just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.

1-47

Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it,take the heaviest coatyou will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will
be justfor you, and just forthe seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, justattach it
to the regularsafety belt.

Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then. make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing itsjob, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is
torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)

1-48

Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, asthey would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.
If belts are cut ordamaged, replace them.Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced.New parts and repairs
may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at
the time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace airbag
system parts. Seethe part on the air bag system earlier
in this section.

kb

NOTES

1-49

$&I

1-50

NOTES

Section 2 Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained arethe instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.
2-2
2-4
2-6
2-9
2- 13
2 - 14
2-16
2- 17
2- 17
2-19
2-20
2-2 1
2-25
2-26
2-28
2-29

Keys
Door Locks
Remote Keyless Entry (RKEj System
Trunk
Theft
Theft-Deterrent System (If Equipped)
PASS-Key(%
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
Shifting Outof PARK (P)
Parking Over ThingsThat Burn

2-29
2-30
2-3 1
2-32
2-32
2-39
2-42
2-44
2-49
2-5 1
2-5 1
2-52
2-52
2-56
2-6 1
2-70

Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You‘re Parked
Windows
Tilt Wheel
Turn SignalMultifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Sun Visors
Cellular Telephone (Option)
Astroroof (Option)
Universal Transmitter (Optionj
Instrument Panel
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
Driver Information Center (DIC)

2-1

Keys

A CAUTION:
Leaving youngchildren in a vehicle with the
ignition key isdangerous for many reasons.
A child or others could be badly injured or
even killed.
They couldoperate power windowsor other
controls or even make the vehicle move. If they
turned the ignition to ON and moved the shift
lever out of PARK (P),that would release the
parking brake. Don’t leave the keys ina vehicle
with young children.

2-2

‘I‘
I

The square key is for the
ignition only. It has a
resistor pellet which is
part of the vehicle's
PASS-Key@II system.

When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer removes the
plug from the door key. The plug has a code on it that
tells the dealer or a qualified locksmith how to make
extra keys. Theignition key has a bar code tag attached
to it rather than a knock out plug. Your dealer or
qualified locksmith can make extra ignition keys by
reading the bar code tag.
There are 15 alternative ignition PASS-Key I1 blanks to
help discourage theft. Keep the bar code tag and the
door key plugs in a safe place. If you lose your keys,
you will be able to have new ones made using the plug
or bar code tag.

The oval key is for the
doors and ail other locks.

I NOTICE:
~

~~

Your vehicle has a numberof new features
that can help prevent theft.You can have a
lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you
to
ever lock your keys inside and you may have
damage your vehicle to get in. Be sure you have
extra keys.

2-3

Door Locks

I A CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers especially children can easily
open the doors and fall out. When adoor is
locked, the inside handle won't open it.
Outsiders can easilyenter through an unlocked
door when you slow downor stop your vehicle.
This may not beso obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle ina
crash if the doors aren't locked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors, and you will befar
better off whenever youdrive your vehicle.

--

--

There are severalways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use either thedoor key or the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
If your vehicle has the optional theft-deterrent system,
you must unlock the doors with the key or remote
keyless entrytransmitter to avoid setting off the alarm.

2-4

Slide the manual lock lever down tolock the doorfrom
the inside.To unlock the door, slide the lock lever up.

Central Door Unlocking System
Your vehicle will have this feature if it is equipped
with the optional theft-deterrent system. When
unlocking eitherdoor, you can also unlock the other
door by holding the key in the turned position for a
few seconds or by quickly rotatingthe door key twice
in the lock cylinder.

Power Door Locks

lock. When thedoor is closed again, it will not lock
automatically. Use the manual or power lock to lock the
door again. If you need to lock the doors before shifting
out of PARK (P), use the manual or power lock button
to lock the doors.

Programmable Automatic Door Locks
(If Equipped)
With the ignition in RUN, the door locks can be
programmed through prompts displayed by the
Driver Information Center(DIC). These prompts
allow the driver to choose various lock settings.For
programming information, see“Programmable, Memory
and Personalization Features” laterin this section.

Anti-Lockout Feature
Press the power door lock switch to lock or unlock both
doors at once.

Automatic Door Locks
Close your doors and turn on the ignition. Every time
you move the shift leverout of PARK (P), both of the
doors will lock. The doors will unlock every time you
stop the vehicle and move the shift lever into PARK (P).
If someone needs to get out while your vehicle is not in
PARK (P), have that person use the manual or power

Leaving your key in any ignition position with either
door open will disable the use of the power door lock
switches as well as the lock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter. If you close the doors, you can lock
them using the remote keyless entrytransmitter. It is
always recommended that you remove your ignition
key when locking your vehicle.
Note that the anti-lockout featurecan be overridden by
holding the driver’s power door lock switch for three
seconds or longer.

2-5

Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle,
open the door, set the
locks from the inside, get outand close thedoor.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System
With this feature,you can
lock and unlock thedoors,
unlock the trunk, open the
fuel door andturn on your
vehicle’s interior lamps
from about 10 feet (3 m)
away using theremote
keyless entry transmitter
supplied withyour vehicle.

Your remote keyless entry system operateson a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must acceptany interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.

2-6

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference,and (2)
this devicemust accept any interference received,
including interferencethat may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes ormodifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could
void authorization
to usethis equipment.
The rangeof this system is about 10 feet (3 m). At times
you may notice a decrease in
range. This is normal for
any remote keyless entry transmitter. If the transmitter
does not work or if you have to stand closerto your
vehicle for thetransmitter to work, try this:
0

Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See the instructions that follow.

0

Check the distance. You may be too farfrom your
vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy
or snowy weather.

0

Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.

0

If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.

Operation

& When you press this symbol to unlock the driver’s
door, the parking lamps on your vehicle will blink twice.
(You can program your vehicle so the parking lamps
will not flash. For more information, see
“LocWnlock
Confirmation” later in this section.) Pressing itagain
within five secondswill unlock the other doors. Pressing
this button will also disarm the optional theft-deterrent
system and turn on the interior lamps at night.

8 When you press this symbolto lock the doors,
the parking lamps will blink once. (You can program
your vehicle so the parking lamps will not flash. For
more information, see“LockKJnlock Confirmation”
later in this section.) This alsoarms the optional
theft-deterrent system.

a Press this symbol to open the trunk. (The
valet button must be off.)
Press this button to open the fuel door. (The
valet button must be off.)

Note that pressing the transmitter buttons numerous
times (approximately 500 times) out of the vehicle’s
operating range may cause the transmitter not to work.
Replacing the battery and pressing the transmitter
buttons 10 or more times out of range will also cause
the transmitter not to work. To reset the transmitter, you
must be within the vehicle’s operating range. Press and
hold the trunk button, and within one second, press and
hold the lock button. Continue to hold both buttons for
approximately three seconds. See your dealer for service
if your transmitter still doesn’t work properly.

Matching Transmitter@)To Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitteris coded to
prevent another transmitterfrom unlockmg your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Once your dealer has
coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not
unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have only up to
four transmitters matched to it.

The remote keyless entry transmittercan also be used
to recall the memory seats for up to two drivers. For
more information, see“Memory Seat and Mirrors”
in the Index.

2-7

Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.

i

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get closeto your vehicle beforethe transmitter works,
it‘s probably time to change the battery.

NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not
to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your
body transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.

2-8

I

1 . Use the round end of the door key or a coin to pry
open the transmitter.

d

Trunk

r

A CAUTION:

?

!,i

2 . Once the transmitter is separated, use a pencil to
remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Remove and replace the battery. Insert the new
battery as the instructionsunder the cover indicate.
b“

P

1

f9

4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly tobe sure

no moisture can enter.

5. Resynchronize the transmitter by pressing and
holding the lock and unlock buttons for about
eight seconds within range of the vehicle. Once the
transmitter is resynchronized, the
horn will chirp
and the exterior lamps will flash.

It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open becausecarbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You can’t seeor smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the trunk lid open or if
electrical wiring or other cable connections must
pass through the seal betweenthe body and the
trunk lid:
Make sure all windows are shut.
n r n the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed withthe setting
on AUTOor ECON and the temperature
between 65°F (18°C) and 85°F (29°C).
That will force outside air into your vehicle.
See “Comfort Controls” inthe Index.
If you have air outlets onor under the
instrument panel, openthem all the way.
See “EngineExhaust” in the Index.

2-9

Trunk Storage System (Option)

Trunk Lock Release

R

TRUNK

I

To use this feature,
your vehicle must be in
PARK (P) and the valet
button must be on. Press
the TRUNK release button,
located above the radio
on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), to open
the trunk.

ACCESS PANEL

RETAINER

TRUNK STORAGE UNIT
SPARE TIRE COVER

You can also press the trunk button on the
remote keyless entry transmitterto access the
trunk compartment.

SPARE TIRE

I

If equipped, the optional trunk storage system can be
used to organize many different items inside the trunk.

To install the storage system:
1. Pull the carpeting from the floor of the trunk. Turn
the retainer (center dial) on
the compact spare tire
cover to the left to remove it.

2-10

3

I .

Place the trunk storage system on the center of the
trunk floor (the cut out portion of the storage system
should be facing the rear of the vehicle).

3. Open the storage systemby pulling up on the handle
located in the carpeted area. This allows the unit to
fold up into place. Fold the divider wallsopen and
move them into the retention slots.
4. Remove the rectangular accesspanel from the floor
of the storage system. The access panel should

unsnap by hand.
5. Center the storage system access hole over
the area
where the spare tire is secured by the retainer.
Position the storage system as needed and then
secure it with the retainer.

6. Replace the access panel.
7. Attach the removable net to the slots locatedon the
front of the divider walls and attach the hooks to the
holes on each side of the storage system.

The following steps explainhow to remove the trunk
storage system for cleaning orin case you need to access
the spare tire.Follow all of these stepsif the storage
system is in the closed position. Begin with Step 2 if
the system is already open.
1. Open the storage system by pulling up on the handle

located in the carpeted area. This allowsthe unit to
fold up into place. Fold the divider walls open and
move them into the retention slots.

2. Remove the rectangular access panel from the floor
of the storage system. Theaccess panel should
unsnap by hand.
3. Center the storage system access hole over the
area where the spare tire is securedby the retainer.
Position the storage system as needed and then
remove the retainer (turn the retainer to the left to
remove it).
4. Replace the access panel and remove the

storage system.

Once in place, the storage system can be moved
forward or rearward for convenience and easy access
of stored items.

2-11

Trunk Lid Automatic Pull-Down Feature

1 A CAUTION:
Your car may have an automatic pull-down
feature that helps closethe trunk electronically.
Your fingers can be trapped under the trunk lid
as it goes down. Yourfingers could be injured,
and you would need someoneto help you free
them. Keepyour fingers away from the trunk lid
as you close it andas it is going down.
With the automaticpull-down feature, you never have to
slam the trunk lid in orderto close the trunk. Instead,
gently lower the trunk liduntil it is nearly shut -- the
automatic pull-down unit will take over and lock the
trunk firmly.

I

/ -

B

A. Trunk Lid
B. Lever
If for some reason thetrunk lid (A) will not close, it may
be because the trunk pull-down unit was accidently
bumped. Even though the trunk lid remains open, the
motor from the pull-down unit has already cycled down.
If this happens, press the lever (B) on the trunk lid. The
pull-down unit motor will reset itself allowing the trunk
lid to closewhen lowered.

Theft

Parking Lots

Vehicle theft is big business, especiallyin some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it impossible to steal. However, there are waysyou
can help.

If you park in a lot where someone will be watching
your vehicle, it’sbest to lock it upand take your keys.
But what if you have to leave your ignition key?

Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joyriders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,
you’ll hear a chime reminding
you to remove your key
from the ignition and take itwith you. Always do this.
so will your
Your steering wheel will be locked, and
ignition and transaxle. And remember to lock the doors.

e If possible, park in abusy, well lit area.
e Put your valuables in a storage area, like your

and lock the
trunk or glove box. Be sure to close
storage area.
Close all windows.
Lock the glove box.
Lock all the doors exceptthe driver’s.
Then take the door key and remote keyless entry
transmitter with you.

Parking at Night
Park in a lighted spot, closeall windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember tokeep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take
them with you.

2-13

the theft-deterrentsystem won’t activate if
Theft-Deterrent System (If Equipped) Remember,
you lock a door with a key or use the manual door lock.

SECURITY

If the ignition is off and
either door is open, the
SECURITY light will flash,
reminding you to activate
the system.

It activates only if you use a power door lock switch or
the remote keylessentry transmitter.

To avoid activating the alarm by accident:
Always unlock a door with a key or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. (Pressing the unlock button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter disablesthe
theft-deterrent system.) Unlocking a door any other
way will activate the alarm. Cycling the ignition
without disarmingthe theft-deterrent system will
also activate the alarm.

The light will also flash if the battery has been
disconnected and reconnected. To activate the
theft-deterrent system:

1. Open the door.

2. Lock the door using the power door lock or the
remote keyless entry transmitter. The SECURITY
light should come on and stay on.

3. Close both doors. The SECURITY light should go
off within about 30 seconds.
The horn will sound and the lamps will flash for about
30 seconds when a door or the trunk is opened without
the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter. The horn
also sounds if the locks aredamaged.

2-14

0

The vehicle should be locked with the door key after
the doorsare closed if you don’t want to activate the
theft-deterrent system.

If you activate thealarm by accident, unlock either
door with yourkey. You can also turn off the alarrn by
using the unlockbutton of the remote keyless entry
transmitter. The alarm won’t stop if you try to unlock
a door any otherway.

Testing the Alarm
1. From inside the vehicle. roll down the window, then
get out of the vehicle, keeping the door open.
2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open, lock
the vehicle using the power door lock or the remote
keyless entry transmitterand close the door. Wait
30 seconds until the SECURITY light goes off.

3. Reach in and unlock the door using the manual lock
and open the door. The horn will sound and the
headlamps will flash.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to
see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown. To
replace the fuse, see "Fuses and Circuit Breakers" in the
Index. If the fuse does not need to be replaced, you may
need to have your vehicle serviced.

To reduce the possibility of theft, always activate the

Valet Lockout Button
Pressing the VALET button
located inside the glove
box will disable the use
of the power trunk, fuel
door and garage door
openers. Pressing this
button again will make
these featuresreusable.
Locking the glove box with
the door key will also help
to secure your vehicle.
Note that the remote keyless entry transmitter can't be
used to open the trunk or fuel door if the VALET button
is pressed in.

theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.

2-15

PASS-Key@I1
Your vehicle is equippea
with the PASS-Key I1
theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key I1 is a passive
system. The system is
armed when the key is
removed from the ignition.

PASS-Key I1 uses a resistor pellet in the ignition key
that is read by the system in your vehicle. If the key
resistor matches the code stored in the vehicle system,
the vehicle’s fuel and starting systems will be enabled. If
an incorrect key is used, the vehicle’s fuel and starting
systems are disabled for three minutes.
Additional
attempts during this lockoutperiod will not start the car,
even with the correct key.

2-16

If the engine does not start and the STARTING
DISABLED REMOVE KEY message is displayed in
the Driver Information Center. your key should be
checked for damage. Starting may be attempted with an
undamaged key immediately. See your dealer or a
locksmith for key service.
If the STARTING DISABLED REMOVE KEY and
WAIT 3 MINUTES messages are displayed,the key
should be cleaned. After three minutes, try again. A
START CAR message will appear at this time.If the
engine still does not start, wait three minutes and try a
duplicate key. At this time, fuses should bechecked (see
“Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index).If the engine
does not start with the duplicate key, your vehicle needs
service. See your dealer for service.
If the THEFT SYSTEM PROBLEM, CAR MAY
NOT START message is displayed during vehicle
operation, a fault has been detected in the system. This
means the PASS-Key I1 system is disabled and is not
protecting the vehicle. The vehicle usually restarts. See
your dealer forservice.

If an ignition key is lost or damaged, see your dealer or
a locksmith to have a new key made.

New Vehicle “Break-In”

Ignition Positions
C

NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t needan elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long
run if you followthese guidelines:
0 Don’t drive at any one speed fast or
slow for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
0 Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops with new liningscan mean
premature wear and earlierreplacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
0 Don’t tow a trailer duringbreak-in.
See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for
more information.

--

--

i

A

i

L

E

With the ignition key in the ignition, you can turn the
switch to five different positions.

ACCESSORY (A): This position lets you use thmgs likt
the radio and the windsheld wipers when the engine is
off. To get into ACCESSORY, push in the key and turn it
toward you. The steering wheel will remain locked, just
as it was before you inserted the key. Once you turn the
key to ACCESSORY, be sure to then turn it to LOCK. If
you leave your key in ACCESSORYwhen the engine is
turned off, your battery will discharge prematurely.

2-17

LOCK (B):Before you put the key in, the ignition will
be in LOCK. This is the only position in which you can
remove the key. This position locks the ignition, steering
wheel and transaxle. It’s a theft-deterrent feature.

NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in
LOCK and you can’t
turn it,be sure you are using the correct key;if
so, is it all theway in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the
key hard. But turn the
key only with your hand.
key or the
Using a tool to force it could break the
ignition switch. If none of this works, then your
vehicle needs service.

OFF ( C ) :This position lets you turn off the engine but
still turn the steering wheel. It doesn’t lock the steering
wheel like LOCK does. UseOFF if you must have your
vehicle in motion while the engineis off (for example, if
your vehicle is being pushed).

RUN (D): This isthe position for driving.
START (E):This position starts the engine.

2-18

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The following accessorieson your vehicle may be used
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned from
RUN to OFF, and then to LOCK:
0

Radio

Power Windows
Astroroof
Power to these accessories stops after 10 minutes or if
either door is opened. If you want power for another
10 minutes, turn the ignition key to RUN, OFF and
then to LOCK.

NOTICE:
When using RAP,always leave yourkey in
LOCK. If you leave yourkey in any other
position than LOCK, your batterywill discharge
prematurely.

1 NOTICE:

Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever toPARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a
safety feature.To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Holding yourkey in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor.

I NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your Cadillac is
moving. If you do, you coulddamage the
transaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.

~

2. If it doesn’t start right away. hold your key in
START for about three seconds at a time until your
engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds between each
try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging
your starter.

I. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turnyour
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.

2-19

3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds.If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again,do the same thing.

NOTICE:
Your engine is designed towork with the
electronics inyour vehicle. If you add electrical
the way
parts or accessories, you could change
the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see
the part of this manual that tells how to do it
without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.

2-20

Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)

I

In very cold weather, 0°F (- 18OC) or colder, the engine
coolant heatercan help. You’ll get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heatershould be plugged in a minimum of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

A CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cordwon’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts. If you don’t. it
could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature,the
kind of oil you have, and some other things.Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealercan give you the best advice forthat
particular area.

Automatic Transaxle Operation
P
R

There are severaldifferent
positions for theshift lever.

N

0
3
2
1

PARK (P): This position locks the front wheels. It’s the
best position to use when you start the engine because
your vehicle can’t moveeasily.

2-21

’

1 A CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the
shift lever is not fully in PARK
(P) with the
parking brake firmly set.Your vehiclecan roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle whenthe engine is
running unless you have to.
If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could beinjured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on
fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If
you’re pullinga trailer, see “Towing a nailer”
in the Index.

Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine.Your vehicle has a Brake-Transaxle
Shift Interlock (BTSI).You have to fully apply your
regular brakesbefore you can shift from PARK (P)

2-22

when the ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shift out
of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever -- push the
shift lever all the way into PARK (P) and release the
shift lever button on the floor shift console models as
you maintain brake application. Then move the shift
lever into the gear you wish. (Press the shift lever button
before moving the shift lever on floor shift console
models.) See “Shifting Out of PARK (P)” in this section.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

NOTICE:
Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your transaxle.
Shift to REVERSE (R)only after your vehicle
has stopped.
Also use this gear to rock your vehicle back and forth to
get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your
transaxle. See “If You’re Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or
Snow” in the lndex foradditional information.

p“
i

f

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels.To restart when you’re
already moving, use NEUTRAL(N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.

A CAUTION:

r

Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while
your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is
dangerous. Unlessyour foot is firmly on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could losecontrol and hitpeople or
objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P)or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.

#-

I

1

r
r

r

NOTICE:
~~

Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting out
of PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine
racing isn’t covered byyour warranty.

OVERDRIVE (@):This position is for normal driving.
If you need more power for passing, and you’re:
Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
The transaxle will shift down to the next gear and
have more power.
I

NOTICE:

d
If your vehicle seems tostart up rather slowly, or

if it doesn’t seemto shift gears as you accelerate,
something may be wrong with
a transaxle system
sensor. If you drive very far thatway, your
vehicle can be damaged. So if this happens, have
your vehicle servicedright away. Until then,you
can use SECOND (2) when you are driving less
than 35 mph (55 km/h) and OVERDRIVE (0)
for higher speeds.

2-23

THIRD (3): This positionis also used for normal
driving, however, it offersmore power and lower fuel
economy thanOVERDRIVE (@).
Here are examples forusing THIRD (3) instead of

OVERDRIVE (0):
When driving on hilly, winding roads.
When towing a trailer, so there is less sh[ifting
between gears.
When going down a steep hill.

SECOND (2): This positiongives you more power. You
can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your
speed as you go down steepmountain roads, but then
you would also want to use your brakes off and on.
~-

NOTICE:
~~~

~~

~~~~

Don’t shift into SECOND (2) unless youare going
slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can
damage your engine.

FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
than SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills,
or in deep snow or mud. (If the shift lever isput in
FIRST (l),the transaxle won’t shift into gearuntil the
vehicle is going slowly enough.)

NOTICE:
If your front wheels can’trotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happen if you werestuck in
very deepsand or mud or were~up
against a solid
object. You could damageyour transaxle.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehiclethere with only the accelerator
pedal. This could cause
overheating and damage
the transaxle.Use your brakes tohold your
vehicle in position ona hill.

Parking Brake
Hold the regular brake
pedal down with your
right foot and push down
the parking brake pedal
with your left foot to set
the parking brake. If
the ignition is on, the
PARK BRAKE indicator
light should come on. If it
doesn’t, you need to have
your vehicle serviced.

If the parking brake has not been fully released and you
try to drive with the parking brake on, the PARK
BRAKE indicator light comes on and stays on. See
“Parking Brake Indicator Light“ in the Index for more
information.
When you move out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N),
if the engine is running, the parking brake should
release. If it doesn’t, you can manually release the
parking brake.

Be sure to turn off the ignition and put the vehicle in
PARK (P) before manually releasing the brake.
Reach under the driver’s sideof the instrument panel
and pull on the manual release lever, which is located
above the parking brake pedal. If the parking brake does
not release, you should either driveto the nearest service
station or have your vehicle towed.

2-25

A CAUTION:
Always shift to PARK(P) before pulling the
manual release lever. If your hand or arm is in
the way of the pedal you could be hurt. The pedal
springs back quickly. Keep your hand and arm
away when you use the manual releaselever.

NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat.
You may have to
replace them andyou could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see
“Towing a Trailer” in the Index. This sectionshows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.

2-26

Shifting Into PARK (P)

A CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out
of your vehicle if
the shift leveris not fully in PARK(P) with the
parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If
you have left the engine running, thevehicle can
move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured.
To be sure your vehicle
won’t move, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that
follow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see“Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.

Console Shift Lever
1. Hold the brake pedaldown with your right foot.

2 . Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:

Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running

A CAUTION:
It canbe dangerous to leave your
vehicle with
the engine running.Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift leveris not fully inPARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly
set. And, if you
leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could
be injured. Don't leave your vehicle with the
engine running unlessyou have to.
3. Hold in the button on the lever and push the lever all
the way toward the frontof your vehicle.

4. With your right foot still holding the brake pedal
down, set the parking brake.
5 . Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

6. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running. be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After
you've moved the shift lever intoPARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the
shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever
wasn't fully locked into PARK (P).

2-27

Torque Lock

Shifting Out of PARK (P)

If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transaxle intoPARK (P) properly, the weight of .the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle.You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever outof PARK (P). This is called “torquelock.” To
prevent torque lock, set the parking
brake and then shift
into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s
seat. To find outhow, see “Shifting IntoPARK (P)” in
the Index.

Your vehicle has a Brake-Transaxle Shift Interlock
(BTSI). You have to fullyapply your regular brakes
before you can shift fromPARK (P) when the ignition
is in RUN. See “Automatic Transaxle” in the Index.

If torque lock doesoccur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some
of the
pressure fromthe parking pawl in the transaxle,so you
can pull the shift lever of
outPARK (P).
.-._

If you cannot shiftout of PARK (P), ease pressureon
the shift lever-- push the shift leverall the way into
PARK (P) and also release the shift leverbutton on the
shift lever asyou maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the
gear you want. (Press the
shift leverbutton before moving the shift-lever.)If you
ever hold the brake
pedal down but still can’t shiftout
of PARK (P), try this:

1. Turn the ignition keyto OFF.Open and close the
driver’s door to turn off the Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) feature.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.

3. Shift toNEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drivegear
you want.
5 . Take your vehicle to an authorized service centeras
soon asyou can.

2-28

Parking Over Things That Burn

Engine Exhaust

A CAUTION:
l a

I A CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under yourvehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves,dry grass or other things that
can burn.

Engine exhaust cankill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide(CO), which you can’t seeor
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damaged in acollision.
Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the roador over road debris.
Repairs weren’t done correctly.
Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

2-29

Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running.But if you
ever haveto, here are some things to know.

I A CAUTION:
I

Idling the engine withthe climate control
system off could allowdangerous exhaust into
your vehicle (seethe earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling ina closed-in placecan let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO)into your vehicle even if
the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust with
CO can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can bea blizzard. (See
“Blizzard” inthe Index.)

--

2-30

--

A CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif
the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when
the engine is
running unless you have to.
If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could beinjured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re fairly
on
level ground, always set your parking brake after
you move the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.

If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling a
trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

Express-Down Window

Windows
Power Windows
F,.. .

The controls are located
near each window. Press the
control forward to raise the
window and press rearward
to lower. Note that the
second rearward position
on the driver's control
operates theexpress-down
window feature.

This feature is present on the driver's power window.
Pressing the controlrearward into the second position
then releasing it will lower thewindow completely.
If you want to stop the window as it is lowering, press
the control forward. Pressthe control forward to raise
the window.
Note that the first position on the control operates the
driver's power window in the non-express mode.

Horn
The horn can be sounded by pressing on the center of
the steering wheel pad.

Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
When you stop your vehicle and turn the ignition key
to OFF, you can still use your power windows. The
electrical power to operate the windows will not shut off
until you open a door or 10 minutes have passed. If you
want this power for another 10 minutes, turn the key to
RUN and back to OFF.

2-31

Tilt Wheel
..

.,

Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
Turn and Lane Change Signals
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down, The lever returns automatically when the
turn is complete.
1

I

c7
Tilt steering allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. Raising the steeringwheel to the
highest level gives your legs more room when you enter
and exit the vehicle.
Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever toward you
to tilt the wheel. Adjust the steering wheel to a
comfortable position and then release the lever to
lock the wheel in place.

2-32

An arrow on the instrument
panel will flash in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.

Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to
signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change
is complete. The lever returns when it's released.
If the turn signal is left on, a warning chime will
sound and the Driver Information Center (DIC) will
display TURN SIGNAL ON (after driving about
1 mile (1.6 km/h))
to remind you to turn it off.

Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn or
lane change may be caused by a burned-out signal bulb.
Other drivers won’t see the turn signal.
Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible
accidents. Check the fuse(see “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers” in the Index) and for burned-out bulbs if
the arrow fails to work when signaling a turn.

Flash-To-Pass
This lets you use the high-beam headlamps to signal
the driver in front of you that you want to pass.
Pull the turn signal lever toward you to use. When
you do:
0

If the headlamps are eitheroff or in the Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) mode, the high-beam
headlamps will turn on. They’ll stay on as long
as you hold the lever there. Release the lever to
turn them off.

0

If the headlamps are on low beam, they will shift to
high beam and stay there. Pull the lever toward you
to return to low beam.

0

If the headlamps are on high beam, they will switch
to low beam. To return to high beam. pull the lever
toward you.

Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
Pull the turn signal lever
all the way toward you and
then release it to change the
headlamps from low beam
to high or from high beam
to low.
This light on the instrument panel will be on, indicating
high beam usage.

2-33

Windshield Wipers

OFF: Turn the band to OFF to turn off the wipers.
Be sure to clear iceand snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they're frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools. Clear
away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

Rainsense Wipers (ETC Only)

WIPER: Turn the band on the turn signal lever to
control the wipers.
MISE Turn the band toward you and then release it for
a single wipe cycle, For more cycles, hold the band on
MIST longer.
LO or HI: Turn the band away from you to either LO
(low speed) or to HI (high speed), depending on the
wiper speed you want.
DELAY: You can set the wiper speed for a long or short
delay between wipes with this setting. Move theband to
the DELAY position. The closer you move it toLO, the
longer the delay. (Eldorado Only)

2-34

This moisture sensor is mounted on the passenger's
interior side of the windshield behind the rearview
mirror and is used to automatically operate the wipers
by monitoring the amount of moisture that is on
the windshield.

The Rainsense system can be activated by turning the
wiper stalk to one of the five sensitivity levelswithin
the AUTO DELAY area. The AUTO DELAY position
closest to OFF is the lowest sensitivity setting. This
allows more water to collect on the windshield between
wipes. Rotating the stalkaway from you to the other
AUTO DELAY settings increases thesensitivity of the
system and frequency of wipes. A single wipe will occur
each time you turn the wiper stalk to a higher sensitivity
level. An initial wipe occurs when you turn the ignition
on as a reminder that Rainsense is active. The
windshield wipers also remain in a “highpark” position
(when the wipers are stopped onthe windshield and are
not in its normal park position), even when the ignition
is turned off.
The Rainsense wipers operate in a delay mode as well as
a continuouslow or high speed depending on the
amount of moisture and the sensitivity level. The MIST
and “wash” cycles operate as normal and are not
affected by the Rainsense function.

I NOTICE:

I

The wipers must be turned
off when going
through a car wash to avoid damage.

It is important to note that the Rainsense wiping feature
(AUTO DELAY) can be overridden at any time by
manually changing the wiper control to LO or HI speed.
If you ever need to replace the windshield, make sure it
is Rainsense compatible.

Windshield Washer

A CAUTION:
In freezing weather, don’tuse your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can formice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
At the top of the turn signal/multifunction lever, there
is a paddle with the word PUSH on it. To spray washer
fluid on the windshield, press and release this paddle.
The wipers will clear the windshield and either stop or
return to your preset speed. For more washer cycles,
press and hold the paddle.

LOW WASHER FLUID will be displayed on the
Driver Information Center(DIC) when the washer
fluid reaches a low level.

Cruise control shuts off when you apply your brakes.

NOTICE:
Driving without washer fluid can bedangerous.
A bad mud splash can blockyour vision and you
could hit another vehicle or go off the road.
Check the washer fluid level often.
J

Cruise Control

A CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
can’t drive safely at a steady speed.So,
don’t use your cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t
use cruise control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. (See“Traction
Control System” in the Index.) When road conditions
allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the
cruise controlback on.

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can help on long trips.
Cruise control doesnot work at speeds below
25 mph (40 k d ) .

2-36

Setting Cruise Control

IA

CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when youdon’t want to. You
could be startled andeven lose control. Keep the
cruise control switchoff until you wantto use it.
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.

2. Accelerate to the speed you want.
3. Press the SET CRUISE button at the end of the lever
and release it. The CRUISE ENGAGEDmessage
will display on the Driver Information Center (DIC).

4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

Resuming aSet Speed
Setting the cruise control at a desired speed and then
applying the brake will end the cruise function.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 M h ) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch from ON to

RIA (Resume/Accelerate) for abouthalf a second to
reset. This returns you to your desired preset speed.
Also note that the Driver Information Center (DIC)
will display the CRUISE ENGAGED message again.
Remember, if you hold the switch at R/A longer than
half a second, the vehicle will accelerate until you
release the switch or apply the brake. So unless you
want to go faster, don’t hold the switch at WA.

Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two waysto go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Push the button at the end of the lever and then
release the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll
now cruise at the higher speed.
Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it
there until you reach a desired speed and then
release the switch. (To increase your speed in
very small amounts, move the switch to WA.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph ( 1.6 km/h) faster.)
The accelerate featurewill only work after you have
set the cruise control speed by pushing the SET
CRUISE button.

2-37

Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control

Using Cruise Control on Hills

There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:

How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may have to stepon the

Push in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach a desired lower speed, then release it. A
CRUISE ENGAGED message will then display in
the Driver Information Center (DIC).

To slow down in very small amounts, push the
button for less than half a second.Each time you
do this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h)slower.

accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear
to keepyour speed down. Of course, applying the brakes
or downshifting intoFIRST (1) takes you out of cruise
control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble
and don’t use cruisecontrol on steep hills.

Ending Cruise Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

There are two ways to end cruise control:
Step lightly on the brake pedal.
Move the CRUISE switch to OFF.

Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise controlset speed memory is erased when
you turn off the cruise control or the ignition.

2-38

Exterior Lamps
The control on the left
side of the instrument
panel controls these
lamp systems:

Pull the lamp control knob out to the first stop to turn
on the parking and taillamps, sidemarker lamps and
instrument panel lights. Pull the knob out all the way to
turn on the headlamps. Push the control knob all the way
back in to turn the lamps and lights off.
Cluster lighting aswell as instrument panel backlighting
will dim only when it is dark outside.

Wiper Activated Headlamps
This feature activates theheadlamps and parlung lamps
after the windshield wipers have been in use for
approximately 20 seconds.
0

Headlamps

0

Taillamps

0

Parking Lamps

0

Sidemarker Lamps

0

License Plate Lamp

0

Underhood Lamp

0

Fog Lamps

0

Instrument Panel Lights

0

Interior Courtesy Lamps

In order to operate the wiper activated headlamps, the
twilight sentinel myst be turned on. This feature lights
the way in poor weather and it also makes your vehicle
more visible to other drivers. If the wiper activated
headlamps are on, and the ignition switch is turned off.
the wiper activated headlamps will immediately turn off.
The wiper activated headlamps will deactivate if you
turn off the twilight sentinel or if the windshield wipers
have been turned off for aperiod of one or two seconds.

2-39

Lamps On Reminder
You will hear a warning chime if you open either door
while leaving the lamps on, if the manual headlamp
control is activated.An exception to this is when you’re
using twilight sentinel.

Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)can make it easier
for others tosee the front of your vehicle duringthe
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawnand before sunset.
The DRL system will make the high-beam headlamps
come on at reduced brightness when:
0

the ignition is on,
the headlamp switch is off and
the transaxle is not in PARK (P).

When DRL are on, onlyyour high-beam headlamps (at
reduced brightness) willbe on. No other exteriorlamps
such as the parking lamps, taillamps, etc.will be on
when the DRL are being used. Your instrument panel
won’t be lit up either.

2-40

When the twilight sentinel switch is on and it’s dark
enough outside, the high-beam headlamps (at reduced
intensity) will turn off and normal low-beam headlamp
operation will occur. When the twilight sentinel switch
is on and it’s bright enough outside, the regular lamps
will go off, and the high-beam headlamps at reduced
brightness will take over forthe DRL.
If it’s dark enough outside and the twilight sentinel
control is off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message
will display on the DriverInformation Center (DIC).
This message informs the driver that turning on the
exterior lamps is recommended even though the DRL
are still illuminated (it’s become dark enough outside
to require the headlamps and/or otherexterior lamps).
Turning on the twilight sentinel, the headlamp switch or
the fog lamp switch will remove the HEADLAMPS
SUGGESTED message.

To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, turn off the
twilight sentinel switch and shift the transaxle into
PARK (P). Placing your vehicle in PARK (P) disables
the DRL. The DRL will stay off until you shift out
of PARK (PI.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.

Twilight Sentinel

Fog Lamps
Use the fog lamps for better
vision in foggy or misty
conditions. When you press
the fog lamp button, a small
indicator light will tell you
that the fog lampsand the
parking lamps are on. Press
the button again to turn
them off.

If you switch on the high-beam headlamps. the fog
lamps will turn off. They'll turn back on again when you
switch to low-beam headlamps.
When the twilight sentinel ison and the fog lamp switch
is activated. the fog lamps will remain on as well as the
headlamps and parking lamps.

Cornering Lamps

The control is next to
the headlarnp knob. It
automatically switches the
lamps on and off by sensing
how dark it is outside.

To operate the twilight
sentinel, leave the lamp
knob off and move the
TWILIGHT control toany
position but OFF.
If you move the control all the way to the right, the
lamps will remain on for approximately threeminutes
after the ignitionhas been turned to OFF or LOCK. If
you move the control so it is just on, the lamps will go
off quickly when you turn the ignition switch out of
RUN. You can adjust the delay time from only a few
seconds to three minutes.

The cornering lamps comeon when the headlamps or
parking lamps are on and you signal a turn. They
provide more light for cornering.

2-41

If it’s dark enough outside and the twilight sentinel
control is off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message
will display on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
This message informs the driverthat turning on the
exterior lamps is recommended (it’s become dark
enough outside to require the headlamps and/or other
exterior lamps).Turning on the twilight sentinel,the
headlamp switch or the foglamp switch will remove
the HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message.

Light Sensor

Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
If the manual parking lamp control hasbeen left on, the
exterior lamps will turn off approximately 10 minutes
after the ignitionis turned to LOCK or ACCESSORY.
This protects drainingthe battery in case you have
accidently left the headlamps or parking lamps on.
If you need to purposely leave the lamps on for
more than 10 minutes with the ignition in LOCK or
ACCESSORY, turn the manual control knob off and
then back on. To delay the lamps from turning off, see
“Twilight Sentinel” earlierin this section.

’.. ._,;, .
,‘ ,:

,
.
I

!,;‘

.. . .,<.,,.>.::.’ ,..:I
.~ ,
,

?,’, :..”;:,$):,$

Interior Lamps

’ , ,:

Instrument Panel Brightness Control
Cluster lighting as well as instrument panel lighting
automatically dims when it becomes dark outside and
your lights are on.When it’s dark, the brightness
control can be manually adjusted. Clusterlighting and
instrument panel lighting automatically brighten when
it becomes light outside.
The light sensor for the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
and the twilight sentinel is located in the center of the
front defogger grille. If you cover the sensor, itwill read
“dark” and the lamps will come on.

Illuminated Entry
The illuminated entry system turns on the courtesy
lamps and the backlighting to the door switches and to
the lamp control knob when a door is opened or if you
press a remote keyless entry transmitter button. Since
the illuminated entry system has a photocell, this means
that it must be dark outside in order for the courtesy
lamps or backlightingto turn on. The courtesy lamps
turn off approximately 20 seconds after the last dooris
closed or after the ignition key is placed in the ignition.

Parade Dimming
This feature prohibits backlightingand the dimming
of the instrument panel lights during daylight while
the
headlamps are on. This feature operateswith the light
sensor for the twilight sentinel and is fully automatic.
When the light sensor reads darkness outside, the
instrument panel lights can be adjusted. Backlighting
to the instrument panelwill also turn on.

Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located in the roof. These lamps
and the interior courtesylamps automatically come on
when either dooris opened and it is dark outside. For
manual operation, press the button to turn them on.
Press it again toturn them off.

If the reading lamps are left on. rney automatically shut
off I O minutes after the ignition has been turned off.

Inadvertent Power Battery Saver
This feature isdesigned to protect your vehicle’s battery
against drainage from the interior lamps,trunk lamp,
glove box lamp, cigarette lighters or the garage door
opener. When the ignition is turned off, the power
to these featureswill automatically turn off after
10 minutes (three minutes if a new car has I5 miles
(24 km)or less). Power will be restored for an additional
10 minutes if either dooris opened, the trunk is opened
or the courtesy lamp switch is turned on.

Storage Mode Personalization
This feature is for longterm use and must be
programmed through the Driver Information Center
(DIC) while the ignition is in RUN. Storage mode
personalization protects the battery by placing your
vehicle in a storage mode so that the radio, amplifiers,
instrument clusterand remote keyless entry will
not drain the battery over a longperiod of time.
For programming information, see “Programmable,
Memory and Personalization Features”later in
this section.

2-43

Mirrors

Mirror Operation

Electrochrornic Daymight Rearview Mirror
When this featureis turned on, the mirror automatically
changes to reduce glarefrom headlamps behind you. A
photocell on the mirror senseswhen it is becoming dark
outside. Another photocell, built into the mirror face,
senses when headlamps are behind you.
At night, when the glare is too high, the mirror will
gradually darken to reduce glare (thischange may take
a few seconds). The mirror will return to its clear
daytime state when the glare is reduced.

To turn on the automatic dimming feature, press
AUTO. To turn off automatic dimming, press OFF.
The green indicator lightwill be illuminated when
this feature is active.
Time Delay
The automatic mirror has a time delay feature which
prevents unnecessary switching from thenight back to
the day position. This delay prevents rapid changing of
the mirror as you drive under lights and through traffic.

2-44

Cleaning the Photocells

r
I

Use a cotton swab andglass cleaner to clean the
photocells when necessary.

I

Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror
with Compass (If Equipped)

i

When on, the compass automatically calibrates as
the
vehicle is driven.
When cleaning themirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampenedwith glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directlyon the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleanerto enter the mirror housing.

Mirror Operation

r
1

r
r

I

1

Your vehicle may have an electrochromic inside
rearview mirror with a compass.

When set in the MIRROR position, this mirror
automatically changes to reduce glare from headlamps
behind you.
The mirror also includesan eight-point compass
display inthe upper right corner of the mirror face.

The right sideof the switch locatedat the bottom of the
mirror turns the electrochromic
mirror on and off. To
turn on the automatic dimming feature, press
MIRROR.
To turn off automatic dimming,press M m O R again.
The green indicator lightwill be illuminated when this
feature is active.

2-45

Compass Operation

To adjust forcompass variance:

Press the COMPASS switch once to turn the compass
on or off.

1. Use the COMPASS button located at the bottom of

When the ignition and the compass feature are on,
the compass will show two character boxes for
approximately two seconds. After two seconds, the
mirror will display the compass heading.

2. Press and hold the COMPASS button until a zone

If, aftertwo seconds, the displaydoes not show a
compass heading (“N’ for North, for example), there
may be a strong magnetic field interferingwith the
compass. Such interference may be caused by a
magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder
or a similar magnetic item.

Compass Variance
The mirror isset .in zone eightupon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compassvariance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as during along distance
cross-country trip, it willbe necessary to adjustfor
compass variance. Compass variance is the difference
between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic
north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance,
your compass could give false readings.

2-46

the mirror.
number appears in the display.

3. Find your current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.

4. Press the COMPASS button on the bottom of the
mirror until the new zone number appears in the
display. After you stop pressingthe button, the
display will show a “C” in the direction display
within a few seconds. (This is the automatic
calibration mode -- you’ll need to drive in a
circle to calibrate the mirror. See “Compass
Calibration” following.)

Power Remote Control Mirror (Heated)
Your vehicle has an electric
mirror control located on
the driver‘s door armrest.

Compass Calibration

If the letter “C” appears in the compass display, the
mirror may need calibration.
The mirror can be calibrated in one of two ways:
Drive the vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/hj or less
until the display reads a direction, or
Drive the vehicle on your everyday routine.

Move the switch in the middle of the control to choose
the right or leftmirror. To adjust the mirror, push the
arrow control in the direction you want the mirror to go.
Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of your
vehicle and the area behind your vehicle.
The mirrors can also be programmed for personalization
if you have the optional memory package. For more
information, see “Memory Seat and Mirrors” in
the Index.

2-47

Driver’s Outside Auto-Dimming
Rearview Mirror
Only the driver’s side outsidemirror will adjust for
the glare of headlamps behind you. This feature
is controlled by the on and off settings on the
electrochromic mirror. See “Electrochromic
Daymight Rearview Mirror” earlier in this section.

Curb View Assist Mirror(If Equipped)
If your mirror is equipped with memory mirrors, it
will also be equipped with the curb view assist mirror
feature. Thisfeature will cause the passenger mirror to
tilt when the vehicle is moving in REVERSE (R). This
feature may be useful in allowing you to view the curb
when you are parallel parking.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and a
five second delay has occurred, the passenger mirror
will return to its original position. If further adjustment
is needed after the mirror is tilted, the mirror switch may
be used. The mirror then returns to itsoriginal position.

2-48

Convex Outside Mirror
Your passenger‘s side mirroris convex. A convex
mirror’s surfaceis curved so you can see more from
the driver’s seat. Thismirror does not have a
dimming feature.

A CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
are.
vehicles) look farther away than they really
you
If you cut too sharply into the right lane,
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.

Storage Compartments

Center Console Storage Area

Glove Box
The glove box is located in front of the passenger’s seat.
To lock the glove box door, insert the oval key into the
lock cylinder and turn it to the right. Turn the key to the
left to unlock the door.

Overhead Console
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
This feature is on vehicles without the optional
astroroof. To gain access to this compartment, which
is located directly above the inside rearview mirror in
the headliner, push up and the storage area will open.

Map Pocket
The map/storage pockets are locatedon each front
door as well as on the passenger’s and driver’s
front seatbacks.

The console includesa storage compartment for CDs
or tapes and an optional phone, an armrest and a
cupholder. The cupholder can be opened by pressing
on the surface panel located in front of the armrest.
Close the lid to secure.

2-49

Rear Storage Armrest (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear seat armrest
which includes an open storage compartment and a dual
cupholder that unfolds for use. To open, lift the front
edge. (This feature is availableon vehicles with leather
interiors only.)

Convenience Net

NOTICE:

-

Don’t put papers or other flammable items
or other
into your ashtrays. Hot cigarettes
smoking materials could ignite them, causing
a damaging fire.

The convenience net is located insidethe back wall of
the trunk. Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the
net. It can helpkeep them from fallingover during
sharp turns or quick starts and stops.

The cigarette lighteris located near the ashtray. Press
it all the way in and release. It will pop back by itself
when it‘s ready to light. You may also have a lighter
located at the rear seat air outlet.

The net is not for larger, heavier loads.
Store them in the
trunk as farforward as you can. When not using the net,
hook the net to the tabs securing it tothe sill plate.

Note that power to the cigarette lighterwill shut off
10 minutes after the ignition is turned off. This helps
to prevent battery drainage. For more information. see
“Inadvertent Battery Saver” earlier in this section.

Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Press on the cover, which is located below the climate
control system, to reveal the front ashtray. To clean this
ashtray, pull it out by gripping the sides.

To use the rearashtray, lift the lid.

2-50

NOTICE:
~~

Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be ableto
back away from the heating element when it’s
ready. That can makeit overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heating element.

Sun Visors

OnStar System (Option)

Swing down the visor to
block out glare. Itcan also be
detached from the center mount and moved to the side.
The driver’s sunshade is also equipped with a storage
flap that can be used for maps or toll tickets.

This system may be ordered through your dealer and
will include the optional fixed cellular telephone. The
following services are available24 hours a day:
0

Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror
Turn the sunshade down and lift the coverto see the
mirror. Move the slide switchup or down to brighten
or dim the lamp.

Cellular Telephone (Option)
Your vehicle has been prewired for dealer installationof
a Cadillacdual-mode (analog/digital) cellular telephone.
A fixed mobile or a portable hand-held system are
available. Either system has steering wheel telephone
controls and information outputthrough the Driver
Information Center (DIC). Voice activation and
hands-free operation are standard features. For more
information, contactyour dealer. A user’s guide is
provided with the telephone.

Roadside Service with Location
Emergency Services Button

0

Remote Door Unlock
Theft Detectioflotification and
Stolen-Vehicle Tracking

0

Automatic Notification of Front Air
Bag Deployment

0

Concierge/Customer Convenience Services

For more information, contactyour dealer.

Assist Handles
A handle, located on each side pillar, can be used when
getting out of your vehicle.

Garment Hooks
For your convenience, a garment hook is attached to
the assist handle.

2-51

Floor Mats
Your vehicle is equipped with rubber-backed front and
rear floor mats. Keep them clean by vacuuming and
using a spotcleaner, if necessary. Do not machine wash.

Astroroof (Option)

Press and hold the switch forward to close the glass
panel. The sunshade can only be closed by hand.

To vent, press theswitch forward when the glass panel
is closed. Open the sunshade by hand. To close the vent,
press the switchrearward.

Universal Transmitter (Option)

I

The control switch only works when the ignition is on or
when the Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
Press the switch rearward and release to express-open
the glass panel and sunshade. The sunshade can also
be opened by hand. If you want to stop the roof in a
partially opened position, press the switch in either
direction. Press and release the switch again to open
it fully.

2-52

This devicecomplies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:
( 1 ) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this devicemust accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.

This device complieswith RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:
(1j this devicemay not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including
interference thatmay cause undesired operationof
the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facilitycould void
authorization to use this equipment.

the two outside buttonson the universal transmitter
until the amber light begins to flash rapidly
(approximately 20 seconds). Then release the
buttons. Thisprocedure initializes the memory and
erases any previous settings forall three channels.

2 . Decide which one of the three channels you want
to program.

Programming the Transmitter

3. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter against the
front surfaceof the universal transmitter so that you
can still see the amber light.

Do not use the universal transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
safety feature. This includesany garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.

4. Using both hands, press the hand-held transmitter
button and the desired button on the universal
transmitter. Continue to press both buttons through
Step 5.

Be sure that people and objects are clearof the garage
door you are programming.

5. Hold down both buttons until you see the amber
light on the universal transmitter flash slowly and
then rapidly. The rapid flashing,which could takeup
to 90 seconds, indicates thatthe universal transmitter
has been programmed. Release both buttons once the
light startsto flash rapidly.

Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. If you have previously programmed a transmitter
channel, proceed to Step 2. Otherwise, hold down

2-53

If you have trouble programming the universal
transmitter, make sure that you have followed the
directions exactly as described and that the battery in
the hand-held transmitter is not dead. If you still
cannot program it, rotate the hand-held transmitter
end over end and try again. The universal transmitter
may not work with older garage door openers that do
not meet current Federal Consumer Safety Standards.
If you cannot program the transmitter after repeated
attempts, consult your dealer.
Be sure tokeep the original hand-held transmitter
in case you need to erase and reprogram the
universal transmitter.

Note to Canadian Owners:During programming, the
hand-held transmitter may stop transmitting after one or
two seconds. If you are programming from one of these
transmitters, you should press and re-press the button on
the hand-held transmitter every two seconds without
ever releasingthe button on the universal transmitter.
Release both buttons when the amber light on the
universal transmitter begins to flashrapidly.

Operating the Transmitter
Press and hold the appropriate button on the universal
transmitter. The amber light comes on while the signal
is being transmitted.
Note that the universal transmitter is disabled when
the valet button inside the glove box is activated. For
more information, see “Valet Lockout Button” earlier
in this section.
Also note that if the hand-held transmitter appears to
program the universal transmitter but does not open
your garage door, and if the garage door opener was
manufactured after 1995, the garage door opener may
have a “rolling code” system. A rolling code system
changes the code of the garage door opener every time
you open or close the garage door.

To determine if you have this system, press the button
on the universal transmitter that you have programmed
already. If the amber light on the universal transmitter
flashes rapidly for one or two seconds and then stops
flashing, the garage door opener has a rolling code
system. In a rolling code system, the garage door
receiver must be trained to the universal transmitter.

Training a Garage Door Opener with
“Rolling Codes”(If Equipped)
If you have not previously programmed the hand-held
transmitter to the universal transmitter. see
“Programming the Transmitter” earlier in this section. If
you have completed this programming already. you now
need to train the garage door opener receiver to
recognize the universal transmitter. Refer to your garage
door opener owner’s manual for the proper transmitter
training procedure foryour garage door opener brand.

1. Locate the training button on the garage door opener
receiver. The exact locationand color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand. If you have
difficulty locating the training button. refer to your
garage door opener manual.

2 . Press the training button on the garage door opener
A light indicator
receiver for one or two seconds.
will begin to flash when the receiver enters the
train mode.
3. Return to the universal transmitter in your vehicle
and press the universal transmitter button you have
already programmed for two to three seconds. Press
the button again to make surethat the universal

transmitter has been trained to the garage door
opener receiver. Check that the training was
successful. The receiver light should no longer
be flashing.
The garage door opener shouldnow recognize the
universal transmitter. You may either use the universal
transmitter orthe hand-held transmitter toopen the
garage door.
If after following these instructionsyou still have
problems training the garage door opener, consult
your dealer.

Erasing Channels
To erase all three-programmed channels,hold down
the two outside buttons untilthe red light begins to
flash. Individual channels cannot be erased, but can be
reprogrammed using the procedure for Programming
the transmitter explained earlier.

Accessories
Accessories forthe universal transmitter are available
from the manufacturer of the unit. If you would like
additional information, please call 1-800-355-35 15.

2-55

Instrument Panel

/
\

I

J

2-56

The instrument panel IS designed to letyou know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast
you’re going, how much fuel you’re using and many of the other things you’ll need to know to drive safely and
economically. The main components of the instrument panel are:
A. Air Outlets
H. Hood Release

B. Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
C. Cluster

D. Radio (Audio System)
E. Driver Information Center Control Buttons

F. LampControls
G. HVAC Steering Wheel Controls (or Cellular
Telephone Controls, If Equipped)

I. Horn
J. Audio Steering Wheel Controls
K. Shift Lever
L. Climate Control Panel
M. Glove Box

2-57

Cluster

United States versionshown, Canadian similar

Speedometer and Odometer
The speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour(km/h). The
odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven,
in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers
(used in Canada).

You may wonder what happens if a vehicle has to have a
new odometer installed. The new one may read the
correct mileage. This is because your vehicle’s
computer
has stored the mileage in memory.

Trip Odometer

TRIP RESET

I

By pressing this button,
you-can tell how far
you’ve traveled since
you last set the trip
odometer back to zero.

For informationon resetting this button, see“Control
Buttons’’ later in this section.

EnglisWetric Display
Press theINFO button until ENGLISHMETRIC
RESET displays and then press INFO RESET to select.
Note that other readings such as temperature, fueland
trip odometer also goback and forth between English
and metric.

2-59

Vehicle Speed Limiter
This feature prevents your vehicle from exceeding
speeds that the tires are not rated for. When this
happens, the engine’s fuel supply is shut off. When the
vehicle speed slows, the fuel supply will come on again.

I NOTICE:
~~

Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
in
the red areaor engine damage may occur.

Tachometer
This gage indicates the
engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).

2-60

Engine Speed Limiter
This feature preventsthe engine from operating at
too many revolutions per minute (rpm). When the
engine’s rpm are critically high, the fuel supply to the
engine is shut off. When the engine speed slows, the
fuel supply will come on again. This helps prevent
damage to the engine.

Warning Lights, Gages and
Indicators
This part describes thewarning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement.Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also saveyou or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicatewhen there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions.Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when
there‘s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, orwhen one of the gages shows

there may be a problem, check the sectionthat tells
you what to do about it. Please follow thismanual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can becostly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle alsohas a Driver Information Centerthat
works along with the warning lights and gages. See
“Driver Information Center” later in this section.

Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime
will come on for about eight secondsto remind people
to fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’ssafety
belt is already buckled.
The safety belt lightwill
also come on and stay on
for about 20 seconds, then
it will flash for about
70 seconds.

If the driver’s beltis already buckled, neitherthe chime
nor the lightwill come on.

2-61

Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness lighton the instrument
panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks the
air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system
check includes the air bag sensors, the airbag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensingand diagnostic module,
For more information on the air bag system, see “Air
Bag” in the Index.

AIR BAG

This light will come on
when you start your engine,
and it will flash for a few
seconds. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stayson after you start the
engine or comes on when you are driving, your airbag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
The air bag readiness light should flash for
a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, haveit fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there isa problem.

Charging System Indicator Light
When you turn the key
to RUN, this light will
come on briefly to show
that the generator and
battery charging systems
are working.

If this light stayson, you need service and you should
take your vehicle to the dealer at once. To save your
battery until you get there, turn off all accessories.

Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there isa brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.

BRAKE
~

I

This light should come
on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to RUN.
If it doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if
there’s a problem.
c

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully.You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is sti1.l on, have the
vehicle towed for service. (See“Towing Your Vehicle”
in the Index.)

1A

CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning lighton can lead
to anaccident. If the light is still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake. The
light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.

Parking Brake Indicator Light

PARK
BRAKE

This lightcomes on when
the parking brake is set, and
it will stay on if the parking
brake does not fully release.
If you try to drive with the
parking brake set, this light
will remain on.

This light should also come on briefly as you start
the vehicle. If it doesn’t, have the light fixed so it
will be ready to remind you if the parking brake has
not fully released. For more information on how to
release the parking brake, see “Parking Brake” earlier
in this section.

2-63

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light

ANT’LOCK

With the anti-lock brake
system, the light(s) will
come on when you start
your engine and may stay
on for several seconds,
That’s normal.

(e)

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. Or. if the
light comes on when you’re driving, stopas soon as
possible and turn the ignition off.Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the light still stays on, or
comes on again while you’re driving,your vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t
on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock
brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is
also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes and there’s a
problem with your regular brakes. See“Brake System
Warning Light” earlier in this section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.

2-64

Traction Control System Warning Light

TRACTION
CONTROL

This warning light should
come on briefly as you start
the engine. If the warning
light doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you ifthere’s
a problem.

If it stays on, orcomes on when you’re driving, there
may be a problem with your traction control system and
your vehicle may need service. When this warning light
is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
The traction control system warning light may come on
for the following reasons:
0

If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically
related to traction control, thetraction control system
will turn off and the warning light will come on.

If the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turn off and
the warning light will come on.
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.

Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light

-

n

This light tellsyou that the
engine has overheated. You
should stop your vehicle
and turn the engine off as
soon as possible. A warning
chime should alsosound if
this light comes on.

As a check, the lightshould come on for a few seconds
when you start your engine. In the section “Problems on
the Road,” this manual explains what to do. See “Engine
Overheating’‘ in the Index.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the
engine coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves
into the red area, the engine
is too hot.

That reading means the same thing as the warning
light -- the engine coolanthas overheated. In the section
“Problems on the Road,” this manual explains what to
do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.

2-65

Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service Engine Soon Light)

SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON

Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.

This system is called OBD I1 (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels forthe
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light
comes on and a chime will sound to indicate that
there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions
often will be indicated by the system before any
problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to
assist your service technicianin correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.

2-66

NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle
with this light
not
on, after a while, your emission controls may
work as well, your fuel economy may not be
as
good and your engine maynot run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not
be
covered by your warranty.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on duringa malfunction in
one of two ways:
0

Light Flashing-- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualifiedservice center diagnosis
and service may be required.

0

Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and
service may be required.

If the LightIs Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
0
0
0

Reducing vehicle speed.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.

If the light stops flashingand remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash,when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place topark your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remainson steady, see“If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps,and drive the vehicle toyour
dealer or qualified service centerfor service.

If the LightIs On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure tofully install
the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel

cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel capwill allow fuel to evaporate into
the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deeppuddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips shouldturn the light off.
Are you low on fuel?

As your engine starts torun out of fuel, your engine may
not run as efficiently as designed since small amounts of
air aresucked into the fuel line causing a misfire. The
system can detect this. Adding fuel should correctthis
condition. Make sure to installthe fuel cap properly. It
will take a few drivingtrips to turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuelyour vehicle with quality fuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed.You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you
put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration or stumbling on acceleration.
(These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the light
to turn on.

2-67

If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuelbrand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuelto turn the light off.

If none of the above steps havemade the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center
check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the propertest equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.

Oil Pressure Light
This light tells you if there
could be a problem with
your engine oil pressure.

When the light cumes on and stays on, it means that
oil isn’t flowingthrough your engine properly. You
could be low on oil and you might have some other
system problem.

1A

CAUTION:

Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your enginecan become so hot that it
catches fire.You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soonas possible and have your
vehicle serviced.

I NOTICE:
The lightgoes on when you turn your key to RUN or
START. It goes off once you start your engine. That’sa
check to be sure the light works. If it doesn’t come on,
be sure tohave it fixed so it will be there to warn you if
something goes wrong.

2-68

Damage toyour engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and is not covered by
your warranty.

1

It takes more (or less) gas to fill the tank than the
gage said. For example, the gage read 8 GALLONS
(30 L), but it took more (or less) than the tank’s

Fuel Gage
The fuel gage shows
approximately how much
fuel i s in the tank. It
works only when the
ignition is in RUN.

remaining capacity to fill it.
0

The gage may change when you turn, stop or
speed up.

Fuel Data Display

Here are a few concerns some owners have had about
the fuel gage. All of these situations arenormal and do
not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage.
0

Everything you need to know about the fuel economy
and how far you can travel with your vehicle’s
remaining fuel is displayed. Fuel data can be obtained
by pressing the INFO button. See “Control Buttons”
later in this section.

At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before the
gage reads F.

2-69

Driver Information Center (DIC)
This display gives you the status of many of your
vehicle’s systems. The DIC is alsoused to display driver
personalization features and warningktatus messages.

DIC Control Buttons

INFO RESET Pressing this button will reset the MPG
AVG, GAL FUEL USED, AVG MPH, TIMER, OIL
LIFE LEFT and ENGLISHMETRIC RESET. Pressing
INFO RESET when a non-resettable display appears
will cause a “recall” mode to occur. When this happens,
all Driver Information Center (DIC) warning messages
that have been displayed since the ignition key was
turned to RUN will redisplay. If no messages were
displayed, a MONITORED SYSTEMSOK message
will appear.
MPG AVG (Reset): Press the INFO button to display
the MPG AVG (Average Fuel Economy), then press
and hold the INFO RESETbutton until 0.0 MPG AVG
is displayed.

TRIP RESET By using this button, you can tell how
far you’vegone since you last set the TRIP RESET back
to zero. To reset, press and hold the button until zeros
appear. If your vehicle is domestic, the trip odometer
will return to zero after 999.9 miles (1 609 km). If your
vehicle is Canadian, the trip odometer will return to zero
after 1 999.9 km (1,242 miles).

GAL FUEL USED (Reset): Press the INFO button
to display the GAL FUEL USED on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), then press and hold the INFO
RESET button until 0.0 GAL FUEL USED is displayed.
AVG MPH (Reset): Press the INFObutton to display
the AVG MPH (Average Speed), then press and hold the
INFO RESETbutton until 0.0 AVG MPH is displayed.
TIMER: This feature is likea stopwatch, in that
you can clock the time it takes to get from one point
to another.

2-70

To operate, press the INFO button to display TIMER.
Each of the fields for the hours,minutes and seconds are
two numeric digits.
Once TIMER OFF 0O:OO:OO is displayed, press the
INFO RESET button to startthe timing feature. Press
the INFO RESET button again to stopit. If you will be
starting and stopping your vehicle -- during a trip for
instance -- the TIMER feature will automatically start
timing where it left off when you last stopped. To reset
it, press and hold the INFO RESET button untilthe
display reads TIMER 0O:OO:OO.Press the INFO button
to exit fromthe TIMER function.

OIL LIFE LEFT (Reset): Press the INFO button to
display the OIL LIFE LEFT, then press and hold the
INFO RESET buttonuntil 100% OIL LIFE LEFTis
displayed. (This onlyneeds to be reset after you have
had the oil changed.)
ENGLISHAWETRIC (Reset): Press the INFObutton to
display ENGLISWMETRICRESET, then press the
INFO RESET button to select. The display will
change
from English (miles) to metric (kilometers).
INFO: Pressing this button repeatedly will display the
RANGE, MPG AVG, MPG INST, GAL FUELUSED,
MPH, AVG MPH, TIMER, BATTERY VOLTS,
COOLANT TEMP, OIL LIFE LEFTand
ENGLISWMETRIC RESET.

FUEL DOOR: Press this button to open the fuel
door. (This featurewill work only when the shift lever
is in PARK (P) regardless of whether or not the vehicle
is running.)

TRUNK: Press this button to open the trunk. (This
feature will work only when the shift lever is in
PARK (P) regardlessof whether or not the vehicle
is running.)

DIC Messages
These messages will appear if there is a problem sensed
in one of your vehicle’s systems. Vehicles that are first
sold in Canada will have a number after each message.
This number helps to identify the message which is only
displayed in English.

-

APPLY BRAKE TO SHIFT 46: This message will
appear if your vehicle is in PARK (P) for about 15
seconds and the brake is not pressed. To remove this
message from the Driver Information Center (DIC)
display, hold the OFF and the blue (cooler) buttons on
the digital cluster controlpanel for about five seconds.
On the analog climate controlpanel, press the OFF
button (next tothe MODE button) and the down arrow
on the PASS TEMP button for about five seconds.Hold
the same two buttons to display the message again.

2-71

-

BATTERY NOT CHARGING 7: This message will

If this message appearsand stays on while driving or

appear if the battery is not being charged. Have the
electrical system checked by your dealership at your
earliest convenience.

after startingyour vehicle, have it checked immediately
to determine the cause of this problem.To help the
generator recharge thebattery quickly, you can reduce
the load on the electrical system by turning off the
accessories. You can monitor battery voltage on the
Driver Information Center(DIC) by pressing the INFO
button. The normal range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.

-

BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH 8: This message
shows that the electrical charging system is
overcharging (more than 16 volts). To avoid being
stranded, have the electrical system checked by your
dealership. You can reduce the charging overload by
using the accessories. Turn on the lamps and radio, set
the climate control on AUTO and the fan speed on HI,
and turn the rear window defogger on. You can monitor
battery voltage on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
by pressing the INFO button. The normal range is
11.5 to 15.5 volts when the engine is running.

-

BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW 6: This message will
appear when the electrical system is charging less than
10 volts orif the battery has been drained. If this
message appears immediately after starting, it is possible
that the generatorcan still recharge the battery. The
battery should recharge and may take afew hours to do
so. Consider using an auxiliary charger to boost the
battery after returning home or to a final destination.
(Be sure to follow themanufacturer’s instructions
when using a battery charger.)

2-72

BRAKE VACUUM PROBLEM -108: The circuit in
the brake booster vacuum has shorted oris loose when
this message appears.Your vehicle may lose power
brakes but you will still have the use of manual brakes.
The power brakes will not be affected if the problem is
caused by a failedsensor. Have your vehicle serviced
immediately at your dealership.

-

CHANGE ENGINE OIL 82: This means that the
life of the engine oilhas expired and it should be
changed within 200 miles (322 km). See “Engine Oil”
and “Filter Recommendations” in the Maintenance
Schedule booklet. After an oil change, the Oil Life
Indicator must be reset. See “Oil Life Indicator” in the
Index on how to reset it.

-

CHANGE TRANS FLUID 47: This message will
appear when it is time to replacethe transaxle fluid. See
the Maintenance Schedule booklet forthe proper fluid
and change intervals.

-

CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL 37: This message
will display if the ignition is in RUN to inform the
driver that the brake fluid level islow. Check the brake
reservoir level and add fluid as needed.Have the brake
system serviced by a technician as soon as possible. If
the brake warning light is on, follow the directions in
that part.

-

CHECK COOLANT LEVEL 2: This message will
appear when there is a low level of engine coolant.
Have the cooling system servicedby a technician as
soon as possible.

-

CHECK FUEL GAUGE 39: This message will
appear when the fuel supply is lessthan 4 gallons
( 15.2 L) and the display is turned off (digital clusters
only). A single chime will also sound when this
message is displayed.

-

CHECK GAS CAP 61: This message will appear if
the gas cap has not been fully tightened. You should
recheck your gas cap to ensure that it’s fully tightened.
CHECK OIL LEVEL 36: For correct operationof
the low oil sensing system, yourvehicle should be on a
level surface. A false CHECK OIL LEVEL message
may appear if the vehicle is parked on grades. Theoil
level sensing system does not check for actual oillevel
if the engine hasbeen off for a shortperiod of time, and
the oil levelis never sensed while the engine is running.

-

If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears and your
vehicle has been parked on level ground with the engine
off for at least 30 minutes, the oil level should be
checked by observing the oil dipstick. Prior to checking
the oil level, be sure the engine has been off for five
minutes and your vehicle is on a level surface. Then
check the dipstick and add oil if necessary. See “Engine
Oil” in the Index.

-

CHECK WASHER FLUID 25: This message will
appear for severalseconds indicating that you need
washer solvent.

-

CRUISE ENGAGED 43: This message will
appear for a few secondswhen you select a speed at
which to cruise.
DOOR AJAR - 141: A door other than the driver’s
is open or ajar when this message appears. The
vehicle’s engine must be running and the transaxle not
in PARK (P) for this message to display. A chime will
also sound when the vehicle’s speed is greater than
5 mph (8 km/h).

-

DRIVER DOOR AJAR 140: This message will
display when the vehicle is being shifted out of
PARK (P) with the engine running tosignal that the
driver’s door is open or ajar. A chime will also sound
when the vehicle’s speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).

-

ENGINE COOLANT HOT-IDLE ENGINE 44:
This message will appear when the engine coolant
temperature is over 248 “F ( 126”C). To avoid added
strain on a hot engine, turn off the climate control
system. Stopand allow your vehicle to idle until it cools
down or the message is removed. If it does not cool
down, turn off the engine and have it serviced before
driving itagain. Severe enginedamage can result from
an overheated engine. See “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.

-

-

ENGINE HOT AC OFF 16: This message displays
when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal
operating temperature. To avoid added strain on a hot
engine, the air conditioning compressor is automatically
turned off so that air conditioned airis not delivered.
If the coolant temperature returns to normal,you
must select AC to return to a normal A/C compressor
operation. If this message continuesto appear, have
the system repaired as soon as possible to avoid
compressor damage.
ENGINE MISFIRE EASE OFF GAS
PEDAL 114: An engine misfire has occurred.
You’11 need to ease off the gas pedal.

-

2-74

--

-

-

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE 42:
This message will appear when the engine has
overheated. Stopand turn the engine off immediately to
avoid severe engine damage. See “Engine Overheating”
in the Index. A multiple chime will also sound when this
message is displayed.

-

ENGINE POWER REDUCED 41: This message
informs you that your vehicle is reducing engine power
because the transaxle is being placed in gear under
conditions that may cause damage to the vehicle
powertrain or vehicle acceleration.

-

FUEL LEVEL LOW 11: This message serves as a
warning that the fuel level in the tank is critically low.
Stop for fuel soon.

-

HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED 23: If it’s dark
enough outside and the twilight sentinel control is off,
a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will display
on the Driver Information Center (DIC). This message
informs the driver that turning on the exteriorlamps
is recommended even though the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) are still illuminated (it’s become dark
enough outside torequire the headlamps and/or other
exterior lamps).

-

ICE POSSIBLE 13: This message appears when
the outside air temperature is cold
enough to create icy
road conditions.

-

LOW REFRIG A/C OFF 12: This message means
that the air conditioningsystem detects a refrigerant
level that is low enough to cause damageto the air
conditioning compressor.To avoid damage, the air
conditioning compressor automaticallyturns off and the
electronic climate controlsystem will automatically
switch from AUTO to ECON and remain there.
Have the air conditioning system serviced if this
message appears.
MONITORED SYSTEMSOK 1: This message only
appears in the “recall” mode by pressing the RESET
button. It lets you know that no other messages are
stored or currently active.

-

-

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE 35: If this
message appears while the engine is running, stop the
engine and do not operate ituntil the cause of low oil
pressure is corrected. Severe damage to the engine can
result. A multiple chime will also sound when this
message is displayed.
OPTIONS NOT SET - 99: This message will display
if a faulthas occurred in your vehicle’s memory. Have
your vehicle serviced by your dealership.

-

PROGRAM PASS KEY 31: This warning message
displays when the PASS-Key I1 pellet information has
not been programmed into your vehicle. See your
dealership for service.

-

PHONE NOT PRESENT 126: This message will
appear when the steering wheel controls forthe optional
phone system are activatedbut the phone is not plugged
into the vehicle. Make sure your phone is plugged in. If
your phone appears to be connected, see your dealership
for service.

-

REMOVE KEY 70: This message will appear
when the Personalized Automotive Security System
(PASS-Key 11) is unable to read the pellet on the
ignition key or an improper key pellet has been
inserted. This messageusually appears followingthe
display of STARTING DISABLED REMOVE KEY.
The instrument panel clusterwill then run a timer and
change the messages to WAIT 3 MINUTES, WAIT 2
MINUTES, WAIT 1 MINUTE and then START CAR.
When the REMOVE KEY message is displayed,remove
the ignitionkey. Check the ignition key for damage. If it
is damaged, it may need to be replaced. If you see no
damage, clean the pellet contacts witha soft clothor
napkin before inserting the key back into the ignition.
Have your vehicle servicedif the message still appears.

2-75

-

SERVICE A/C SYSTEM 14: This message appears
when the electronic sensors that controlthe air
conditioning and heating systems are no longer working.
Have the climate controlsystem serviced if you notice
a drop in heating and air conditioningefficiency.

-

SERVICE AIR BAG 83: There is aproblem with the
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint (air bag)system when
this message appears. Let only a qualified technician
work on your vehicle. See your dealership for service
at once.

-

SERVICE BRAKE FLUID SWITCH 37: A defect
in the brake fluid detection circuit causesthis message
to display if the ignition is in RUN. Have the brake
system serviced by a technician as soon as possible.
If the brake warning light is on, referto the directions
listed in that part.
SERVICE CHARGING SYSTEM 102: This
message will display when a problem with the charging
system has been detected. Have your vehicle serviced at
your dealership.
SERVICE ELECTRICSYS 106: This message will
display if an electricalproblem has occurred within the
Powertrain ControlModule (PCM). Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealership.

-

-

2-76

-

SERVICE FUEL SYSTEM 101: The PCM has
detected a problem within the fuel system when this
message appears. Seeyour dealership for service.

-

SERVICE IDLE CONTROL 107: A problem
with the idle control has occurred when this
message displays. Drive your vehicle to the dealership
for service.

-

SERVICE RIDESYS 84: This message is displayed
to indicatethat the suspension system is not operating
properly. To correct this problem, have your vehicle
serviced at your dealership.

-

SERVICE STEERING SYS 127: This message is
displayed when a problem has been detected in the
Magnasteer variable effort steering system. Service
is required. A single chime will also sound when this
message is displayed.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION 100: If a problem is
detected with the transaxle, this message will appear.
Have your vehicle checked by your dealership.
TM

-

-

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON 3: If a problem is
detected with the transaxle, thismessage will appear.
Have your vehicle checked by your dealership.

-

STABILITY SYS ENGAGED 55: You may see
the STABILITY SYS ENGAGED message on the
Driver Information Center. It means that an advanced,
computer-controlled system has come on to help your
vehicle continue to go in the direction in which you’re
steering. This stabilityenhancement system activates
when the computer sensesthat your vehicle isjust
starting to spin, as it
might if you hit a patch of ice or
other slippery spoton the road. When the system is on,
you may heara noise or feel a vibration in the brake
pedal. This is normal.
When the STABILITY SYS ENGAGED message is on,
you should continue to steerin the direction you want to
go. The system is designed to help you in bad weather or
other difficult driving situationsby making the most of
whatever road conditions will permit. If the STABILITY
SYS ENGAGED message comes on, you’ll know that
something hascaused your vehicle to start to spin, so
you should consider slowing down.

-

SERVICE STABILITYSYS 54: If you ever seethe
SERVICE STABILITY SYS message, it means there
may be a problem with your stability enhancement
system. If you see this message, try to reset the system
(stop; turn off the engine; then start the engine again).If
the SERVICE STABILITY SYS message still comes on,

it means there is a problem. You should see your dealer
for service. Reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.
A single chime will also sound when this message
is displayed.

-

STARTING DISABLED REMOVE KEY 33: This
message will appear when the Personalized Automotive
Security System (PASS-Key 11) senses that an improper
ignition key is being used to try to start the vehicle.
Check the ignitionkey for damage. If it is damaged, it
may need to be replaced. If you see no damage, clean
the pellet contacts with a soft clothor napkin. Remove
the ignition key and wait forthe Driver Information
Center (DIC) to displayWAIT 3 MINUTES. The
instrument panel cluster will then run a timer and
change the messages to WAIT 2 MINUTES, WAIT
1 MINUTE and then START CAR. When the START
CAR message is displayed, try again to start the engine.
THEFT SYSTEMPROBLEWCAR MAY NOT
RESTART 34: This message means there is a problem
in the Personalized Automotive Security System
(PASS-Key 11). A fault hasbeen detected in the system
which means that the PASS-Key I1 system is disabled
and is not protecting thevehicle. The vehicle usually
restarts, however, you may want to take your vehicle to
a proper service center before turningoff the engine.

-

2-77

-

-

TOP SPEED FUEL OFF 111: This message will
appear when the PCM senses that the maximum speed
for your vehicle has been reached. The speed of your
vehicle will decrease severalmph as the fuel supplyis
cut off. Thisallows your vehicle to stay in a stable
operating range.

-

TRACTION ENGAGED 91: When your traction
control system is limitingwheel spin, the TRACTION
ENGAGED message will be displayed. Slipperyroad
conditions may exist if this message is displayed, so
adjust your driving accordingly. This message will stay
on for a few seconds after the traction control system
stops limitingwheel spin.

-

TRACTION OFF 89: This message will be displayed
after the traction control has been turned off.
TRACTION READY 90: This message informs the
driver that thetraction control system is available. This
occurs when the traction odoff button in the glove box
has been returned to an on position (pressing the button
once turnsthe traction control systemoff pressing the
button again turns the system back on). This message
also self cancels after five seconds.

-

-

TRACTION SUSPENDED 56: This message
displays when the traction control system has been
temporarily shut off because your vehicle’s brakes
have overheated. Thismessage does not indicate a
problem with your vehicle’s traction control system.
After a few minutes, the traction control system will
be available again and the TRACTION READY
message will appear.

-

TRANS FLUID RESET 48: With the engine not
running and the ignition on, press and hold the OFF
and rear defog buttons until the TRANS FLUID
RESET message appears on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) (between five and 20 seconds).

-

TRANS HOT IDLE ENG 112: This message
indicates that the trans’axle fluid in your vehicle is too
hot. Stop and allow your vehicle to idle until it cools
down or until this message is removed.
TRUNK OPEN - 24: This message indicates that the
trunk is open when your vehicle’s ignition isin RUN.

-

TURN SIGNAL ON 20: This message is a reminder,
after driving about 1 mile (1.6 km/h), that you have the
turn signal on. A multiple chime will also sound when
this message is displayed.

VEHICLE OVERSPEED- 52: A failure in the
suspension control systemhas occurred when this
message appears. ThePCM determines the speed your
vehicle is limited to. Have your vehicle serviced if this
message appears.

Memory Seat and Mirrors

6

VEHICLE SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH
(KM/H) 113: A failure in the suspension control
system has occurred when this message appears. The
PCM determines the speed your vehicle is limited to.
Have your vehicle servicedif this message appears.

-

-

To begin progranming,
adjust the driver’s seat
(including lumbar
adjustments) and both
outside mirrors to a
comfortable position
and then press the SET
button. Within five
seconds, press button “ 1 .”

Programmable, Memory and
Personalization Features (If Equipped)

:4 ’

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
features that can be individually programmed,
memorized or personalized for up to two drivers.For
a brief description of each feature (except for climate
control and radio personalization), seeeach feature
in the Index.

A second mirror and seating position may be
programmed by repeating the above steps and pressing
button “2” instead of button 1. Note that each time a
memory button is pressed, a single beep will sound
through the left front speaker.

If your vehicle isin PARK (PI, you can recall mirror and
seating positions by briefly pressing button 1 or 2. This
will adjust the seat and mirrors to where you have
previously programmed them.If you have accidentally
pressed one of the memory recall buttons and want tostop
seat or mirror movement, pressone of the manual seat or
mirror control buttons. This cancels a memory recall.

2-79

You can also recall a seat and mirror position if your
vehicle is not in PARK (P). Press and hold either the
1 or 2 button until seat and mirror movement is
complete. Releasing the buttons will stop adjustment.

DRIVR UNLOCK INPARK: All doors automatically
lock when shifted outof PARK (P). Only the driver’s
door automatically unlocks when shifted into PARK (P).
DRIVR UNLOCK IN KEY OFF: All doors

The EXIT button can be programmed to allow easy exit
for up to two drivers. Adjust the seat to a comfortable
“exit” position and then press the SET button followed
by the EXIT button. While your vehicle is in PARK (P),
briefly press the EXIT button torecall your programmed
exit position.

automatically lock when shifted out of PARK (P).
Only the driver’s door automatically unlocks when the
ignition key is turned to OFF.

Programmable AutomaticDoor Locks
Your vehicle’s ignition must be in RUN. To begin
programming, press and hold the INFO and INFO
RESET buttons at the same time to display the
following prompts.

DOORS LOCKIN GEAR: All doors automatically
lock when shifted out of PARK (P). No automatic
door unlock.
DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK:All doors automatically
lock when shifted out of PARK (P) and unlock when
shifting intoPARK (P).

2-80

DOORS UNLOCK KEY OFF: All doors
automatically lock when shifted out of PARK (P). All
doors automaticallyunlock when the ignition key is
turned to OFF.
A “yes” or “no” response must be made after each
prompt is displayed in order to continueon to the next
prompt or personalization feature. Theyes and no
buttons are displayed in amber on the vehicle’s digital
control panel. Press the TRIP RESET button to choose
yes, press the INFO RESET button to choose no or
press the INFO button to “skip” to the next
personalization feature.
FEATURE ON appears when a yes response ismade
and FEATURE OFF appears with a no response.

If a no response is made after the DOORS LOCK IN
GEAR prompt is displayed,FEATURE OFF will appear.
The automatic door lockingsystem has been disabled
and no other door lock messages will be displayed.
LGHTS FLSH AT UNLOCK, which is the next
available personalization featureto display, will appear
next. See “Lock/Unlock Confirmation” in the Index for
more information.
If a yes response is made after theDOORS LOCK IN
GEAR prompt is displayed, FEATURE ON appears.
The automatic door lockingsystem is enabled and
allows the DRIVR UNLOCK IN PARK prompt to
appear. Choosing this prompt advances you to LGHTS
FLSH AT UNLOCK whereas a no response will
display the D W R UNLOCK KEY OFF prompt.

If DRIVR UNLOCK KEY OFF is chosen,FEATURE
ON appears. You will advance to the LGHTS FLSH
AT UNLOCK prompt. If you don’t choose this
prompt, FEATURE OFF appears as well as the next
prompt -- DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK. If this prompt
is chosen, FEATURE ON appears. If a no response
was made. DOORS UNLOCK KEY OFF will appear.
At this point, ayes or no response automatically brings
up the LGHTS FLSH AT UNLOCK feature.

Lock/Unlock Confirmation
This personalization feature allowsthe driver to
program the parlung lamps to blink when the lock or
unlock buttons on theremote keyless entry transmitter
are pressed. to program the horn to sound when the lock
button is pressed and/or toprogram the exterior lamps to
turn on when the unlock button is pressed. Press the
TRIP RESET button to answer yes, press the INFO
RESET button to indicate no or press the INFObutton
to skip to the next personalization feature.
To begin programming, your vehicle’s ignition must be
in RUN. Press and hold the INFO and INFO RESET
buttons at the same time to display the following
prompts. LOCKKJNLOCK confirmation is the second
feature toappear:To skip past the first personalization
feature, press the Information (INFO) button.

LGHTS FLSH AT UNLOCK: Parking lamps blink
twice when the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitteris pressed.
LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK: Parking lamps blink
once when the lock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter is pressed.
HORN SOUNDS AT LOCK: Horn sounds when
the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
is pressed.

2-81

EXT LIGHTS AT UNLOCK: Exterior lamps (parking
lamps, taillamps, sidemarker lamps,license plate lamps,
low-beam headlamps, etc.) turn on when the unlock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed
and it is dark outside. These lamps stay on for about 20
seconds or until the key is turned OFF.
The prompts listed here appear in the same order as
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
FEATURE ON appears when a yes response is made
and FEATURE OFF appears with a no response. To
skip to the next personalization feature (REMOTE
RECALL MEMORY), press the INFO button.

Remote Recall Memory (If Equipped with
Memory Personalization)
Memory settings that have been previously programmed
(climate control settings, radio preset settings, exterior
lighting choices, remote confirmation choicesand
programmable automatic door lock choices)can be
recalled by using the remote keyless entry transmitter or
by placing the key in your vehicle’s ignition.

2-82

Before you begin programming, make sure that your
vehicle’s ignition is in RUN. To begin programming,
press the INFO and INFO RESET buttons at the same
time for about two seconds. As mentioned, remote recall
memory is the third feature to appear. To skip past the
first two personalization features, press the INFO button.
When REMOTE RECALLMEMORY appears, the
driver is able to recall memory settings when the unlock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is
pressed. Press the TRIP RESET button to select or press
the INFO RESET button to answer no and to continue
on to the next prompt. FEATURE ON displays when a
yes responseis made.
If a no response was made, the KEY IN RECALL
MEMORY prompt will’show next. This choice recalls
memory settings when the key is placed in your
vehicle’s ignition. FEATURE ON displays fora yes
response, and FEATURE OFF for a no response. A yes
or no response is required.

Curb View Assist Mirror (If Equipped
with Memory)
If your vehicle has this personalization feature,
MIRROR TILT IN REV will be the fourth
personalization prompt to display on the Driver
Information Center(DIC).
To program your vehicle, press the INFO and INFO
RESET buttons at the same time forabout two seconds.
When MIRROR TILT IN REV appears?a yes or no
response is needed.Press the TRIP RESET button to
answer yes or the INFO RESET button to answer no.
FEATURE ON displays when a yes response is made
and FEATURE OFF shows after a no response. Tf

Press the TRiP RESET button to answer yes or press
the INFO RESET button to indicate a no response.

FEATURE ON appears when a yes response is made
and FEATURE OFF shows when a no response is made.
Since this is the last personalization feature available. a
yes or no response will end out of the Driver
Information Center (DIC) display.
Once the battery guard has been programmed, your
vehicle will enter the storage mode about 20 minutes
after the ignition key has been turned o f f .

you do not want this feature, press the INFO button
to skip to the next personalization feature which is
STORAGE MODE.

Your vehicle will stay in the storagemode until the
ignition key is turned out of LOCK. The system will
"wake-up" when the door key is inserted into the door,
however, your vehicle will remain in the storage mode.
The ignition must be out of LOCK before the battery
guard is disabled.

Storage Mode Personalization

Home and Away Feature

Before you begin programming, make sure that your
vehicle's ignition is in RUN. To begin programming,
press the INFO and INFO RESET buttons at the same
time for about two seconds.
The first message to appear
is DOORS LOCK IN GEAR. Press theINFO button
after this prompt is displayed until STORAGE MODE
prompt appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC).

To program. hold two radio preset buttons at the same
time until HOME PWSETS DRVR 1 ( DRVR 2)
appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC) display.
At this time, you are able to input your desired radio
stations. Holding the same two radiopreset buttons
again will display AWAY PRESETS DRVR 1 (or
DRVR 2 ) . Radio stations that are out of your normal
operating range can be input at this time.

Climate Control Personalization
With this feature, your vehicle will recall the latest
climate control settingsas adjusted the last time your
vehicle was operated. This feature allowstwo different
drivers to store and recall their own climate control
settings. The settings recalledby the climate control
system are determined by which remote keyless entry
transmitter (“1” or “2”) was used to enter the vehicle.
The number on the back of the remote keyless entry
transmitter correspondsto driver 1 or to driver 2. After
the unlock button is pressed onthe remote keyless entry
transmitter or the ignition key is placed in the ignition,
the climate control settings will automatically adjust to
where they were last set. The settings can also be
changed by briefly pressing the memory seat
buttons 1 or 2 located on the driver’s door.

Radio Personalization
With this feature, your vehicle will recall the latest radio
settings as adjusted the last time your vehicle was
operated. This feature allows two
different drivers to
store and recall their own radio settingsfor AM and FM
presets, last tuned station, volume, tone and audio
source (radio, cassette or CD). The settings recalled by

2-84

the radio are determined by which remote keyless
entry transmitter (1 or 2 ) was used to enter the vehicle.
The number on the back of the remote keyless entry
transmitter corresponds to driver 1 or to driver 2. After
the unlock button is pressed on the remote keyless entry
transmitter and the ignition is in RUN, the radio settings
will automatically adjust to where they were last set by
the identified driver. The settings can also be changed by
briefly pressing the memory seat buttons 1 or 2 located
on the driver’s door. The new settings will be saved for
the driver.

Continuous Variable -- Road Sensing
Suspension (CV-RSS) (ETC Only)
The CV-RSS automatically adjusts the ride of your
vehicle. Automatic ride control is achieved through a
computer used to control and monitor the suspension
system. The controller receives input from various
sensors to determine the proper system response. If the
controller detects a problem within the system, the
Driver Information Center (DIC) will display a
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL message. If this message
appears, have your vehicle serviced at your dealership.

Oil Life Indicator

This feature lets you know when to change the engine
oil. It’sbased on the engine oil temperatures and your
driving patterns. To see the display, press the INFO
button several times until XX OIL LIFE LEFT appears.
If you see 99% OIL LIFE LEFT, 99 percent of your
current oil life remains.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) may display
a CHANGE ENGINE OIL message. Always keep
a written record of the mileage and date when you
changed your oil. For more information, see the
Maintenance Schedule booklet. If you see CHANGE
ENGINE OIL, it means that you have less than
10 percent of the oil life left and you should consider
changing your engine oil.
The system should indicate changing the oil between
3,000 miles (5 000 kmj and 7,500 miles (1 2 500 km).
It may indicate changing the oil before 3.000 miles
( 5 000 km) depending on your driving habits. If the
vehicle has been driven 7.500 miles ( 1 2 500 km). it
will indicate to change the oil. If you drive in a dusty
area, you should change your oil every 3.000 miles
( 5 000 km)or three months (whichever comes first)
unless the display indicateschanging it sooner. The
system doesn’t check hmt*much oil you have, so you’ll
still have to check for that.To see how, see “Engine Oil’’
in the Index.
When the oil is changed. you‘ll need to reset the system.
To reset, display the Oil Life Indicator by pressing the
INFO button. Then press and hold the INFO RESET
button until the display shows 100% OIL LIFE LEFT.

2-85

b

NOTES

-,

Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be
sure to read about the particular systems suppliedwith your vehicle.
3-2
3-2
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-9
3- 10
3-13
3-1 8

Comfort Controls
Climate Control Panel
Electronic Solar Sensor
Air Conditioning
Heating
Ventilation System
Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
HVAC Steering Wheel Controls
Climate Control Personalization (If Equipped)
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player (If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player with Radio Data
Systems (RDS) and Digital Signal Processing
(DPS) ( I f Equipped)

3-27
3-28
3-3 1
3-32
3-32
3-33
3-34
3-34
3-35
3-36
3-36
3-37

Radio Data Systems (RDS) Program Type
(PTY) Selections
Trunk Mounted CD Changer (If Equipped)
CD Adapter Kits
Radio Personalization (If Equipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
Power Antenna Mast Care

Comfort Controls
This section tells you how to make your air system work
for you. Your Electronic Climate Control (ECC) system
uses ozone-friendly R- 134a refrigerant.

With the ECC system, you can control the heating,
cooling and ventilation in your vehicle. Your vehicle
also has a flow-throughventilation system described
later in this section.

Climate Control Panel

Fan Button
The button with the fan symbol adjusts the fan speed.
Press the up arrow to increase fanspeed and the down
arrow to decrease fan speed.

3-2

Driver’s Side TemperatureKnob
The TEMP/AUTOknob adjusts the air temperature
coming through the system. Turn the TEMPIAUTO
knob to the right to increase the temperature and to the
left to decrease the temperature. Press the TEMP/AUTO
knob to put the system in the automatic mode.
Passenger’s Side Temperature Button
With this dual-zone feature,the right front passenger
can control the temperature of air forhisher own zone.
The passengercan select a fourdegree warmer or cooler
temperature from the driver’s setting. To turn the system
on, press the PASSREMP button. Press the up arrow to
increase the temperature and press the down arrow to
decrease the climate sating. Pressing the OFF button
will turn off the dual-zone function.
Outside Temperature Display
The outside temperature is always displayed when your
vehicle is running.You can change it from Fahrenheit to
Celsius by pressing the INFO button (above the radio)
until ENGLISHMETRIC RESET displays. Once
displayed, pressthe INFO RESET button to select.

The outside temperature sensoris located near the front
grille. The sensorcan be affected by road or engine heat
during idling, slow driving or when the engine is first
started after a short trip.
In order to ensure proper
automatic climate control operation,the outside air
temperature display may not update as quickly as
expected. This is to allow the air surrounding the outside
temperature sensor tobe as close to the actual outside
conditions as possible. This is determined by how much
time has elapsed sincethe vehicle has been turned off
and by vehicle speed.

Mode Button
Press this button to deliver air through the floor, middle
or windshield outlets.The system will stay in the
selected mode until the MODE button is pushed again.
Press the up or down arrow to cycle through the
available modes.

Automatic Operation
When the system is set for automatic operation, sensors
will control the air deliverymode. Air will come from
the floor, middle or windshield outlets. The fanspeed
will vary as the system maintains the selected
temperature setting.

Be careful not to put anything over the solar sensor
located in the middle of the instrument panel near the
windshield. This sensoris used by the automatic system
to regulate temperature.

To find your comfort zone, start withthe 75°F (24°C)
setting and allow about 30 minutes for the system to
regulate. Turn the TEMP/AUTO knob to adjustthe
temperature if necessary. If you choose 60°F ( 16"C),
the system will remain at that maximum cooling setting
and will not regulate fan speed.If you choose the
temperature of 90°F (32"C),the system will remain at
that maximum heating setting and will not regulate fan
speed. Choosing either maximum settingwill not cause
the system to heat or coolany faster.
With the automatic setting,the air conditioning
compressor automatically cycles when needed to cool
the air. In cold weather, when the system senses the need
for heat, the airflow will be directed out the floor
outlets. As the interior temperatureapproaches a desired
setting, the blower speed will decrease. To maintain
interior comfort, the airflow may move to the instrument
panel air outlets and floor outlets (bi-level mode).On
bright sunny days in cold weather, the airflow may come
out of the air conditioning outlets (AC mode) to
maintain comfort and prevent stuffiness.

3-3

If your vehicle is sitting out on a hot day and you have it
set on AUTO, the air will first flow out the floor air
outlets for a few seconds. That is normal. This is to
expel hot air from the air outlets.As the air is cooled,
the airflow will move through the air conditioning
outlets. If you start your vehicle with the fan settingon
HI, it will skip the air conditioningpurge.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system
will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on the outside air
temperature, engine coolant temperatureor the time
since the engine was last started.As the coolant warms
up, the blower fan speed will gradually increase and air
will flow from the heater outlets, with some aifflow
to the windshield to prevent fogging under most
normal conditions.
If you leave your vehicle, the system will remember the
control setting the next time you start your engine,
except for recirculation and defrost. Each ignition cycle
cancels recirculation, whereas, DEFROST will change
to automatic operation when the ignition is shut off and
then turned back on.

3-4

Manual Operation
You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or
fan speed.
A0

/J AC: This setting directs airflow through the
middle instrument panel outlets.
A0

BI-LEVEL: This setting directs airinto your
vehicle in two ways. Cool air is directed to the upper
portion of your body through the four instrument panel
outlets while warmed air is directed to the floor.
l#

w. HEATER/DEFROST: This setting directs air to
'fl

the floor outlets and toward the windshield.
0

HEATER: This'setting directs warmed air
through the floor outlets. Some warm air is diverted to
the windshield to minimize fogging.
DEFROST Press this button to quickly remove
fog or frostfrom the windshield. This setting sends most
of the airflow to the windshield with only a small
amount to the floor outlets.
I#

% FAN SPEEDS: Press the button with the fan
symbol on it until AUTO is displayed on the screen.
At this setting, the fanspeed is automatically controlled.
If it is cold outside, theblower may not run in the
maximum high fan speed right away. The system checks
the temperature of the engine coolant to assureit is
warm enough to provide heat. When the engine coolant
is warm, the controller allows the fanto gradually
increase to a higher speed. This prevents cold air from
blowing into thepassenger compartment. If you want
the blower fan at a high speed, press
the up arrow button
until you see HI on the display. If you want the fan
speed to be automatic,but you like the fanspeed to be
higher than the AUTO setting, pressthe fan symbol
button until HI AUTOis shown on the display. If you
want the blower fan at a low speed, pressthe down
arrow button until LO is shown on the display. If you
want thefan speed to run lower than theAUTO
setting, press the button until LO AUTO is shown
on the display.

OFF: Press this button to turn the system off. Fresh air
will continue to flow through the vehicle, and the
system will try to maintain the previouslyset
temperature. The outside temperature will show
on the
display when the system is OFF.

AC: Press this button to turn the air conditioningon and
off. The system will cool and dehumidify the air inside
the vehicle. In the AUTO mode, the display will show
that AC is active,but the air conditioning compressor
only operates when the system determines itis needed.
RECIRCULATION: Press this button to limit the
amount of fresh air enteringyour vehicle. This ishelpful
when you are trying to cool the air quickly
or limit odors
entering your vehicle. In the AUTO mode, the system
will use recirculation as necessaryto cool the air.
Pressing therecirculation button will change the
operation to a manual mode and the air will recirculate
non-stop. Press this button again to turn off the
recirculation feature.
If you notice the windows fogging, press the
recirculation button to exit the recirculation mode.

3-5

Electronic Solar Sensor

Press the AC button or the TEMP/AUTO knob to turn
the system on and then select the proper MODE to direct
airflow. The system will cool and dehumidify the air
inside the vehicle. Also while in the AUTO mode, the
system will use recirculation as necessary to cool the air.
You may also need to adjust the interior temperature and
the fan speed as needed.
When the air conditioner is on, you may sometimes
notice slight changes in your vehicle’s engine speed
and power. This is normal because the system is
designed to cyclethe compressor on and off to keep the
desired temperature.

The sensormonitors the sun’s solar radiation and is
located on top of the instrument panel near the
windshield. The ECC panel uses this information to
automatically make the necessary temperature and
airflow adjustments to maintain your comfort.

Air Conditioning
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside airescape. This reduces the time it takes for your
vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed
for the air conditionerto work its best.

3-6

Heating
Press the MODE buttdn to select heater. Adjust the
interior temperatureto a comfortablelevel and if the fan
speed needs adjusting, press the up or down arrow.
Outside air will be brought in and sent through the floor,
air conditioning orbi-level outlets (dependingon the
condition). Theheater works best if you keep your
windows closed while using it.

Ventilation System
Your vehicle's flow-through ventilation system supplies
outside air intothe vehicle when it is moving. Outside
air will also enterthe vehicle when the heater or the air
conditioning fan is running.

-

...,I .. .

, ,
I

.

.

,

..

:

.

The direction of airflow forthe rear seats can also be
adjusted. Movethe fan leverto adjust theblower speed
from LO to HI. Move the vent lever to directthe airflow.
The front outlets are locatedin the center and at each
side of the instrument panel.You can adjust the
direction of airflow by moving the center control levers
or you can stop the aifflow by moving the lever located
on each side of the outlets downward.

3-7

Ventilation Tips
0

Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater
and defrosterwill work far better, reducing the
chance of fogging the insideof the windows.

0

When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, adjust the
fan to the highest speed for a few moments before
driving off. This helps clearthe intake outletsof
snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of
fogging the inside of the windows.

0

Keep the air path under the front seats clearof objects.
This helps circulateair throughout your vehicle.

Defrosting
Use DEFROST to remove fog or ice from the windshield
quickly in extremely humid or cold conditions.

Rear Window Defogger
The lines you see on the
rear window warm the
glass. Press this button to
turn on the rear defogger.
With it, the rear window
and both outside rearview
mirrors are heated.

The system will automatically shut off after 10 minutes.
If further defogging is desired,press the button again.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decals
across the defogger grid onthe rear window.

NOTICE:
~

Press the DEFROST button. If you select DEFROST,
adjust the fanspeed by pressing the fan button up or
down. If you select DEFROST from AUTO, the system
will control the fan speed. Thetemperature also needs to
be adjusted by turning the TEMP/AUTO knob.
Note that recirculation is not available in the defrost or
defog modes.

3-8

~~~

Don’t usea razor blade or something else sharp
on the insideof the rear window.If you do, you
or the
could cutor damage the warming grid
integrated rear window antenna, and the repairs
wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

HVAC Steering Wheel Controls
Some heatingand cooling
controls can be adjusted at
the steering wheel. Other
touch controls operate some
audio controls. See “Audio
Steering Wheel Controls”
later in this section.

FAN SPEED: Press the up arrow lever to increase
the fan speedand the down arrow lever to decrease
fan speed.
TEMP: Press the up arrow lever to increase
the temperature and the down arrow lever to
decrease temperature.

Climate Control Personalization
(If Equippedj
This feature allows both driver’s (driver1 or 2 depending
on the number on the back of your remote keyless entry
transmitter) to personalize their own climate control
settings. For more information, see “Programmable,
Memory and Personalization Features”in the Index.

Audio Systems
Your Cadillac audiosystem has been designed to operate
easily and give years of listening pleasure.You will get
the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself
with it first. Find out what your audio system can do
and how to operate all its controls,to be sure you‘re
getting the most out of the advanced engineering that
went into it.

Setting the Clock
Press and hold HR or MN until the time display begins
to change. Release the button as you get close to the
correct time. The time may be set anytime the clock is
displayed. There isa two-second delay before the clock
goes into time-set mode.

3-9

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player

Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to select AM, FMl or FM2
and preset stations.
SEEK-TUNE: Press and release this button to seek to
the next higher orlower radio station. Pressing and
holding this button until a chime sounds puts the radio
in a tune mode. In this mode, higher or lower radio
stations are advanced to in small increments until the
SEEK-TUNE button is released. Tuning stops when you
release this button. If you press and hold the
SEEK-TUNE button again within five seconds of
being in the tune mode, tuning will continue. Waiting
longer than fiveseconds places the radio back in the
seek mode.

Playing the Radio

PWRNOL: Press this knob lightly to turn the system
on. Press theknob again to turn the system off. To
increase volume, turn the knob to the right. Turn it to the

SCAN: Press this button and SCAN will appear on the
display. Use SCAN to listen to stations for a few
seconds. The radio will go to a station, stopfor a few
seconds, then go on to the next station. Press this button
again to stop scanning,

left to decrease volume. The volume level will appear
on the display.

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:

DSPL: Press this button to display the station
being played.

1. Turn the radio on.

3-10

2. Press BAND to select AM, FMl or FM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

Setting the Tone

4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for

BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn

more than two secondsuntil you hear a beep.
Whenever you press that numbered button for less
than two seconds, the station you set will return.

the knob to the right to increase and to the left to
decrease bass.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
will not have to reset your radio presets becausethe
radio remembe,rs them.

PRESET SCAN: Press and hold SCAN for two to three
seconds until PRESET SCAN appears on the display to
listen to each of your preset stations for afew seconds
(factory presets which have not been reprogrammed
with your stations will be ignored). The radio will go to
the first preset station storedon your pushbuttons, stop
for a few seconds,then go on to the next presetstation.
Press SCAN again to stop scanning.If a preset station
has weak reception, the radio will not stop atthe
preset station.

TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to the right to increase and to the left to decrease
treble. If a station is weak or noisy. you may want to
decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.

Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to the right to adjust sound to the right speakers
and to the left for the left speakers. The middle position
balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to the right to adjust the sound to the front
speakers and to the left for the rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.

3-11

Playing a Cassette Tape
With the radio on, insert a cassette tape. The tape will
begin playing as soon as it is inserted.When one side of
your cassette tape is done playing, auto reverse plays the
other sideof your cassette tape. If you want to insert a
cassette tape when the ignition is off, first press EJECT.
While the tape is playing,use the VOL, FADE, BAL,
BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio.
Other controls may have different functions whena tape is
inserted. The display will show TAPE with an arrow to
indicate which sideof the tape is playing. PLAY will
appear on the display temporarily whena tape is playing.
The display will then revert back to showingthe time.
If an error occurs while trying toplay a cassette tape, it
could be that:
The cassette tape is tight and the cassette player
cannot turn the hubs of the tape. Hold the cassette
tape with the open end down and try turning the right
hub to the left with a pencil. Flip the tape over and
repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your cassette
tape may be damaged and should not be used in the
player. Try a new tape to be sure your player is
working properly.
The cassette tape is broken. (Check to see if your
tape is broken. Try a new tape.)

3-12

REV Press the left arrow to rewind the tape rapidly.
The radio will play while the tape reverses and REV
will appear on the display. You may use your station
pushbuttons to tune to another radiostation while in
REV mode. Press the left arrow again to return to
playing speed.
FF: Press the right arrow to fast forward to another part
of the tape. The radio will play while the tape advances
and FF will appear on the display. You may use your
station pushbuttons to tune to another radio
station while
in FF mode. Press the right arrow again to return to
playing speed.

SEEK-TUNE: Press the right arrow to seek tothe next
selection on the tape. Press the left arrow to search for
the previous selection'on the tape (REP will appear on
the display). Your tape must have at least three seconds
of silence between each selection for SEEK-TUNE to
work. The sound will mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press this button. SCAN FF will appear on the
display until the next selection is found and then SCAN
PLAY will appear on the display. Use SCAN to listen to
selections for a few seconds. Thetape will go to a
selection, stop fora few seconds, then go on to the next
selection. Press this button again to stop scanning.
SIDE: Press this button to change the side of the tape
that is playing. (PLAY shows on the display.)

SOURCE: Press this button to select a source. If no
cassette tape is in the tape player, CASS appears on the
display and then the radio station appears briefly. The
display then reverts back to showing the time of day.
Press this button again or BAND to switch back to
the radio.

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player (If Equipped)

A EJECT Press the upward triangle button to
remove a tape. The radio will play. Eject may be
activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes may be
loaded with the radio off but they will not start playing
until the PWR button is pressed. Press PWR or turn the
ignition key off to stop the cassette tape player. The tape
will stay in the player and resume play at the point
where it stopped.

CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Playing the Radio

PWRNOL: Press this knob lightly to turn the system
on. Press the knob again to turn the system off. To
increase volume, turn the knob to the right. Turn it to the
left to decrease volume.

3-13

SOURCE: Press this button to select a source. Sources
include cassette and compact disc. The audio source
must be loaded to play. Available loaded sources are
shown on the display. If a source isbeing used, it will be
underlined on the display. If none of the audio sources
are loaded, NO SOURCE LOADED will appear on the
display. Press this button again or BAND to switch back
to the radio.

MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Pressit
again to turn on the sound.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to select AM, FM1 or FM2
and preset stations.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed it has two
positions. Press this button to the firstposition to
manually tune to higher or lower stations. If this button
is held at the first position for a few seconds, the radio
will continue tuning until this button is released. Press
this button to the second position and release to seek to
the next higher or lower radio station.
SCAN: Press this button for less than two seconds to
scan radio stations. The radio will go to a station, stop
for five seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
this button again to stop scanning.

3-14

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations.You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FMl and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select AM, FMl or FM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
Whenever you press that numbered button for less
than two seconds, the station you set will return.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
will not have to reseryour radio presets because the
radio remembers them.

PRESET SCAN:Press and hold SCAN for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep to listen to each of
your preset stations for five seconds. The radio
will go
to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons,
stop for fiveseconds, then go on to the next preset
station. PressSCAN again to stop scanning. If a preset
station has weak reception, the radio will not stop at the
preset station.

Setting theTone

TONE: Press and release this button until the desired
tone control (BASS or TREBLE)is found.

LEVEL: After selecting the desired tone control. press
the plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on this button to select
the desired level.
Adjusting the Speakers

4 SPEAKER: Press and release this button until the
desired BALANCE orFADE control is found.

LEVEL: After selecting the desired BALANCE or
FADE control, press theplus (+) or minus (-1 symbol on
this button to select the desired level.
Playing a Cassette Tape
With the radio on, insert a cassette tape. The tape
will
begin playing as soon as it is inserted. When one side of
your cassette tape is doneplaying, auto reverse playsthe
other side of your cassette tape. Cassette tapes may be
loaded with the radio off but they will not start playing
until the radio is on. If you want to insert a cassette tape
when the ignition is off, first press EJECT.

While the tape is playing, use the VOL, TONE. LEVEL.
and SPEAKER controls just as you do for the radio.
Other controls may have-different functionswhen a tape
is inserted. The display will show an underlined tape
symbol. TAPE PLAY will appear on the display when a
tape is playing, with an arrow to indicate which side of
the tape is playing.
If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape, it
could be that:
0

The cassette tape is tight and the cassette player
cannot turn the hubs of the tape. Hold the cassette
tape with the open end down and try turning the right
hub to the left with a pencil. Flip the tape over and
repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily. your cassette
tape may be damaged and should not be used in the
player. Try a new tape to be sure your player is
working properly.
The cassette tape is broken. (Check to see if your
tape is broken. Try a new tape.)

RW: Press the left arrow to rewind the tape rapidly. The
radio will play while the tape rewinds. You may use
your station pushbuttons to tune to another radio station
while in RW mode. Press the left arrow again to return
to playing speed.

3-15

FF: Press the right arrow to fast forward to another part
of the tape. The radio will play while the tape advances.
You may use your station pushbuttons to tune to another
radio station while in FF mode. Press the right arrow
again to return to playing speed.

TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has two
positions. This button works the same, whether it is
pressed to the first or second position. Press this button
to seek tothe next or previous selection on the tape.
Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence
between each selection for TUNE-SEEK to work. The
sound will mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections for a few
seconds. The tape will go to a selection, stop for a few
seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press this
button again to stop scanning.
SIDE: Press this button to change the side of the tape
that is playing.

3-16

A EJECT Press the upward triangle button to
remove a tape. The radio will play. Eject may be
activated with the radio off andor the vehicle
ignition off.

CLEAN TAPE: If this message appears on the display,
the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still
play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player’’ in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold EJECT for three seconds to
reset the CLEAN TAPE indicator.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Auto Cr02 allows the cassette tape player to adjust to
the type of cassette tape forclearer sound for Cr02
cassette tapes.

Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio are on
and the underlined compact disc symbol appears on the
display, the disc will begin playing. Compact discs may
be loaded with the radio off but they will not start
playing until the radio is on. If you want to insert a disc
when the ignition is off, first press EJECT.
The integral CD player can play the smaller 8 cm
compact discs. Full-size compact discs and the smaller
compact discs are loaded in the same manner.

If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s very hot,
the disc may not play. If the disc comes out,it could
be that:
The disc is upside down.
0

It is dirty, scratched or wet.
The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcan’t be
corrected, please contact your dealer.

R W Press and hold the left arrow to reverse the
compact disc. Release it to return to playing speed.
FF: Press and hold the right arrow to fast forward to
another part of the compact disc. Release it to return to
playing speed.

TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has two
positions. This button works the same. whether it is
pressed to the first or second position. Press this button
to seek to the next or previous selection on the
compact disc.

SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections for a few
seconds. The compact disc will go to aselection, stop
for afew seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press
this button again to stop scanning.

RDM: Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. Press RDM again to turn
-

off random play.

A EJECT Press the upward triangle button to
remove a compact disc. The radio will play. Eject
be activated with the radio off and/or the vehicle
ignition off.

3-17

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player with Radio Data
Systems (RDS) and Digital Signal
Processing (DSP) (If Equipped)

SOURCE: Press this button to select a source.Source
include cassetteand compact disc. The audio source
must be loaded to play. Available loaded sources are
shown on the display. If a source is being used, it will be
underlined on the display. If none of the audio sources
are loaded, NO SOURCE LOADED will appear on the
display. Press this button again or BAND to switch back
to the radio.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to select AM, FM1, FM2 or
weather, and preset stations.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed it has two
positions. Press this button to the first position to
manually tune to higher or lower stations. If this button
is held at the first position for a few seconds, the radio
will continue tuning until this button is released. Press
this button to the second position and release to seek to
the next higher or lower radio station.
Playing the Radio

PWRNOL: Press this knob lightly to turn the system
on. Press the knob again to turn the system off. To
increase volume, turn the knob to the right. Turn it to the
left to decrease volume.

3-18

SCAN: Press this button for less than two seconds to
scan radio stations.The radio will go to a station, stop
for five seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
this button again to stop scanning.

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. The RDS PTY mode
must be off to use this mode. You can set up to 24 stations
(six A M , six FM1, six FM2 and six weather). Just:

Using RDS Mode
Your audio system is equipped with Radio Data Systems
(RDS). RDS mode gives you many useful new features.
When RDS is on, the radio can:

1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FM 1, FM2 or weather.

seek only to stations with the types of programs you
want to listen to.

3. Tune in the desired station.

seek to stations with traffic announcements.

4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for
more than two seconds.Whenever you press that
numbered button for less than two seconds, the
station you set will return.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
When battery power is removed and later applied, you
will not have to reset your radio presets because the
radio remembers them.

PRESET SCAN: Press and hold SCAN for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep to listen to each of
your preset stations for five seconds.The radio will go
to the first presetstation stored on your pushbuttons,
stop for five seconds,then go on to the next preset
station. Press SCAN againto stop scanning. If a preset
station has weak reception, the radio will not stop at the
preset station.

0

receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies,

0

receive and display messages from radio stations and

0

search for a stronger station when a station is too
weak for listening.

RDS features are only available foruse on FM stations
which broadcast RDS information.

0RDS SELECT Press the orange rectangular
button to use the alternate RDS functions (RDS, TA,
MSG, PTY and < PTY > ) located on the six numbered
pushbuttons. RDS SELECT: will appear on the display.
The alternate RDS functions are only available when
you are using the FM band of your radio.

3-19

RDS (1): With RDS off, press the RDS SELECT button,
followed by this button to turn RDS on. The RDS
display will turn on. You must have RDS on to use the
new RDS functions. The RDS display will also turn on
if one of the other RDS function buttons has been
pressed on. If you are tuned to a station broadcasting
RDS information, the station’s call letters and Program
Type (PTY) will replace the station’s frequency on the
display. After five seconds, the program type will be
replaced on the display by the station’s program type
name. The program type and program type name may be
the same ordifferent. Press SOURCE torecall the
frequency and program type displays. If the radio is
tuned to a station that is not broadcasting RDS
information, the station’s frequency will remain on the
display. While RDS is on, the radio will search for a
stronger station in the network when a station gets too
weak for listening. Press the RDS SELECT button,
followed by this button again to turn RDS off. All RDS
functions will be turned off.

REGION: You can also use the RDS button to access
the region function. When an RDS station becomes
weak, this function searches for a stronger station within
the same network. A network can span a great distance.
One network can have stations spread across a country
or continent. Each network breaks down into regions.
With regions, local news items like weather and traffic

3-20

are available to you. When the region function is on,the
radio only searches for stations in the same network and
region. You can only use the region function when RDS
is already on. Press the RDS SELECT button. Then
press and hold the RDS button for two seconds.
REGION: ON will appear on the display. While
REGION: ON appears on the display, press the RDS
button again to turn the region function off. REGION:
OFF will appear on the display. The region function can
be turned on again by pressing the RDS button.

TA (2): Press the RDS SELECT button, followed by
this button to receive traffic announcements. The radio
will turn on the TA display. TP will appear on the
display if the tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements. You may also receive traffic
announcements from stations in the network related to
the tuned station. If the current tuned station does not
broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a
station which does. When the radio findsa station which
broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop. If no
station is found, NONE FOUND will appear on the
display. When SEEK or SCAN ispressed with the
traffic announcement function on, the radio will only
stop at stations which broadcast traffic announcements.

While a trafficannouncement plays, the radio uses a
special type of volume called TA volume. To increase TA
volume, turn the PWRNOL knob to the right. Turn it to
the left to decrease volume. TA VOLUME will appear on
the display while the volume is being adjusted.
When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
station or a related network station, you will hear it,
even if the volume ismuted or a cassette tape or
compact disc is playing. If the radio tunes to a related
network station for a traffic announcement? it will return
to the original station when the announcement is
finished. If the cassette tapeor compact disc player was
being used, the tape orcompact disc will stay in the
player and resume play at the point where it stopped.
Press the RDS SELECT button, followed by this button
again to turnTA off.

MSG (3): When RDS ison, if the current station has a
message, MSG will appear on the display. Press the
RDS SELECT button, followed by this button to see the
message. If the whole message does not appear on the
display, parts of the message will appear every three
seconds until the message iscompleted. To see the parts
of the message fasterthan every three seconds, press this
button again. A new group of words will appear on the
display. Once the completemessage has been displayed,

MSG will disappear from the display until another new
MSG is received. Each message can only be read once.

PTY (4): This button is used to turn on and off Program
Type (PTY) seeks and scans. Press the RDS SELECT
button, followed bythis button. The PTY display will turn
on. RDS SELECT. PTY NEWS will appear on the display
for three seconds. (The PTY shown will be the last PTY
selected.) Pressthe RDS SELECT button, followed by this
button again to turn the PTY display off.

< PTY > ( 5 ) (6): With RDS on, press the RDS SELECT
button, followed by < or > . The F’TY display will turn
on, if it is not already on. RDS SELECT: PTY NEWS will
appear on the display for three seconds. (The PTY shown
will be the lastPTY selected.) Whilethis message is
displayed, use < *and > to move up and down the PTY
list. If you pause on a PTY for three seconds, PRESET
PTY NEWS will appear on the display.W e this
message is displayed, you can savethe PTY in a preset by
pressing one of the six numbered pushbuttons untilyou
hear a beep. Allowthree seconds for the message to
disappear if you do not want to save the ITY in a preset.
See “Radio Data Systems (RDS) Program Type (PTY)
Selections” in the Index.
When the PTY display is on, press SEEK and SCAN to
find radio stations of the PTY you want to listen to. The
last PTY selected will be used for seek and scan modes.

3-21

If a station with the selected PTY is not found, NONE
FOUND will appear on the display. If both PTY and TA
are on, the radio will search for stations withtraffic
announcements and the selected PTY.

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite Program Types (PTYs).
These buttons have factory PTY presets. See “Radio
Data Systems (RDS) Program Type (PTY) Selections”
in the Index. You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FMl and
six FM2). Just:

1, Turn PTY on.

2. Press BAND to select E M 1 or FM2.
3. Tune an RDS station with the PTY you desire.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
Whenever you press that numbered button for less
than two seconds,the PTY you set will return.
5 . Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
When battery power is removed and later applied,you
will not have to reset your RDS presets because the
radio remembers them.

HR or MN: Press the RDS SELECT button, followed
by one of these buttonsto display the timefor the
current station.STATION TIME IS will be displayed. If

a time has not been sent to the radio, NO STATION
TIME will be displayed. If you have recently tuned to
the station, you may need to wait a minute before the
time is available to the radio. To set the clock to the
current displayedstation time, press and hold HR or MN
until TIME UPDATED is displayed. There is a two
second delay before the time is updated. RDS mode
does not have to be on to use this function. but you must
be tuned to an FM RDS station.

ALERT This type of announcement warns of national
or local emergencies. You will not be able to turn off
alert announcements. Alert announcements will come on
even if RDS mode is turned off. ALERT appears on the
display when an alert announcement plays. The radio
uses TA volume during theseannouncements. To
increase volume, turn the PWRNOL knob to the right.
Turn it to the left to decrease volume. TA VOLUME
will appear on the display while the volume is being
adjusted. When an alert announcement comes on the
tuned radio station or arelated network station, you will
hear it, even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or
compact disc is playing. If the radio tunes to a related
network station for an alert announcement, it will return
to the original station when the announcement is
finished. If the cassette tape or compact disc player, play
will stop for the announcement and resume when the
announcement is finished.

Setting theTone

0

DRIVER SEAT: This setting adjusts the audio to
give the driverthe best possible sound qualities.
DRIVER SEAT can be used at any time for any
material. Rear seat passengers in the vehicle may not
get the same effect.

0

LIVE: This setting is used to enhance the

TONE: Press and release this button until the desired
tone control (BASSor TREBLE) is found.
LEVEL: After selecting the desired tone control. press
the plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on this button to select
the desired level.
DSP: The Digital Signal Processing (DSP) feature is
used to provide a choiceof four differentlistening
experiences: TALK, DRIVER SEAT, LIVE and
AUDITORIUM. DSP can be used while listening to the
radio, the cassettetape player or the CD player. Press
this button to turn DSP on. Press and release this button
until you reach the desired selection. To turn DSP off,
press and hold this button until DSP OFF appears
on the display.
0

TALK: This setting is used when listening to
non-musical material such as news, talk shows,
sports broadcasts and books on tape. TALK makes
spoken words sound very clear.

stereo effect.
0

0

AUDITORIUM: This setting is used to make the
listening space seem larger.
LEVEL: Press the plus (+) or minus ( - ) symbol on
this button to adjust the amount of effect desired
when in DSP mode.

Adjusting the Sp.eakers
TONE: Press and release this button until the desired
BALANCE or FADE control is found.
LEVEL: After selecting the desired BALANCE or
FADE control, press the plus (+) or minus (-) symbol on
this button to select the desired level.

3-23

Playing a Cassette Tape
With the radio on, insert a cassette tape. The tape will
begin playing as soon as it is inserted. When one side of
your cassette tape is done playing, auto reverseplays the
other side of your cassette tape. Cassette tapes may be
loaded with the radio off but they will not start playing
until the radio ison. If you want to insert a cassette tape
when the ignition is off, first press EJECT.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, TONE, LEVEL
and DSP controls just as you do for the radio. Other
controls may have different functionswhen a tape is
inserted. The display will show an underlined tape
symbol. TAPE PLAY will appear on the display when a
tape is playing, with an arrow to indicate which side of
the tape is playing.

3-24

If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape, it
could be that:
The cassette tape is tight and the cassette player
cannot turn the hubs of the tape. Hold the cassette
tape with the open end down and try turning the right
hub to the left with a pencil. Flip the tape over and
repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your cassette
tape may be damaged and should not be used in the
player. Try a new tape to be sure your player is
working properly.
The cassette tape is broken. (Check to see if your
tape is broken. Try a new tape.)

RW: Press the left arrow to rewind the tape rapidly. The
radio will play while the tape rewinds. You may use
your station pushbuttons to tune to anotherradio station
while in RW mode. Press the left arrow again to return
to playing speed.

FF: Press the rightarrow to fast forward to another part
of the tape. The radiowill play while the tape advances.
You may use your station pushbuttons to tune to another
radio station whilein FF mode. Press the right arrow
again to return to playing speed.

TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has two
positions. This button works the same, whether it is
pressed to the first or second position. Press this button
to seek to the nextor previous selection on the tape.
Your tape must haveat least three seconds of silence
between each selection for TUNE-SEEK to work. The
sound will mutewhile seeking.
SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections for afew
seconds. The tape will go to a selection. stop for few
a
seconds, then go on to the next selection. Pressthis
button again to stop scanning.
SIDE: Press this button to changethe side of the tape
that is playing.

/1\ EJECT Press the upward triangle button to
remove a tape. The radiowill play. Eject may be
activated with the radio off and/or the vehicle
ignition off.

CLEAN TAPE: If this message appears on the display,
the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still
play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold EJECT for threeseconds to
reset the CLEAN TAPE indicator.

Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Auto Cr02 allows the cassette tape player to adjust to
the type of cassette tape for clearersound for Cr02
cassette tapes.

3-25

Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot,label side up. The
player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio are on
and the underlined compact disc symbol appears on the
display, the disc will begin playing. Compact discs may
be loaded with the radio off but they will not start
playing until the radio is on. If you want to insert a disc
when the ignition is off, firstpress EJECT.
The integral CD player can play the smaller 8 cm
compact discs. Full-size compact discsand the smaller
compact discs are loaded in the same manner.

If you’re drivingon a very rough road or if it’s very hot,
the disc may not play. If the disc comes out, it could
be that:
The disc is upside down.
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
The air is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, please contact yourdealer.

3-26

RW: Press and hold the left arrow to reverse the
compact disc. Release it to return to playing speed,
FF: Press and hold the right arrow to fast forward to
another part of the compact disc. Release it to return to
playing speed.

TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has two
positions. This button works the same, whether it is
pressed to the first or second position. Press this
button to seek to the next or previous selection on the
compact disc.

SCAN: Press this button to listen to selections for few
a
seconds. Thecompact disc will go to a selection, stop
for a few seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press
this button again to stop scanning.
RDM: Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. Press RDM again to turn
off random play.

A EJECT: Press the upward triangle button to
remove a compact disc. The radiowill play. Eject may
be activated with the radio off and/or the vehicle
ignition off.

Radio Data Systems (RDS) Program Type
(PTY) Selections
PTY List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description
Adlt Hit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adult Hits
Any
Any . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Classical
Classic1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cls Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Classical Rock
College . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . College
Country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Country
Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information
Jazz
Jazz, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Language
News
News . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nostalga . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nostalgia
Oldies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oldies
Persnlty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personality
Public
Public . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R & B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rhythm and Blues
Re1 Musc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Religious Music
Re1 Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Religious Talk

PTY List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description
Rock Music
Rock M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soft . . . . . . . . . + , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft
Soft Rock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft Rock
sports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sports
Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Talk
Top40
Top40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weather

Factory PTY Presets
Preset
Preset 1

I

FMl

I

FM2

Adult Hits

Jazz

Preset 2

Classical

Oldies

Preset 3

News

Religious Music

Preset 4

Public

Soft Rock

Preset 5

Rock

R&B

Preset 6

Country

Top 40

~

3-27

Trunk Mounted CD Changer (If Equipped)
With the compact disc changer,you can play up to
12 discs continuously. Normal size discsmay be
played using the trays supplied in the magazine. The
smaller discs(8 cm) can be played only with specially
designed trays.

NOTICE:
Objects in the trunk which may shift or
slide
CD changer.
during driving could damage your
Protect your CD changer by using the
convenience net whenever possible. Place large
objects in the trunk appropriatelyso that they
will not come into contactwith the CD changer.

3-28

A

i
L

k

You must first load the magazine with discs beforeyou
can play a compact disc. Each of the 12 trays holds one
disc. Pressthe button on the back of the magazine and
pull gently on one of the trays. Load the trays from
bottom to top, placing a disc on the tray label sidedown.
If you load a disc label side up, the disc will not play
and an error will occur. Gently push the tray back into
the magazine slot. Repeat this procedure for loadingup
to 12 discs in the magazine.

,

"i

* A d

Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine, slide
open the door of the compact disc (CD) changer. Push
the magazine into the changer in the direction of the
arrow marked on top of the magazine.

Close the door by sliding it all the way to the left. When
the door is closed, the changer will begin checking for
discs in the magazine. This will continue for up to one
and a half minutes, depending on the number of
discs loaded.
To eject the magazine from the player. slide the CD
changer door all the way open. The magazine will
automatically eject.Remember to keep the door closed
whenever possible to keep dirt and dust from getting
inside the changer.

3-29

Whenever a CD magazine with discs is loaded in the
changer, the CDchanger symbol will appear on the
radio display.If the CD changer is checking the
magazine for CDs, the CD symbol will flash on the
display until the changer is ready to play. When a CD
begins playing, a discand track number will be
displayed. Thedisc numbers are listed on the front of
the magazine.
All of the CD functions are controlledby the radio
buttons, except for ejecting
the CD magazine.

PUSHBUTTONS: Press buttons onethrough six to
select compact discs one through six. Press and hold one
of the six pushbuttons until a beep soundsto select
compact discs 7 through 12. These pushbuttons
represent the order of the discsloaded in the changer.
DSPL: Press and hold this button to see the track
elapsed time (availableon the AM-FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player only).

REV/RW Press and hold this button to reverse quickly
through a track selection.
FF: Press and hold this button to advance quickly
through a track selection.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player, use SEEK-TUNE. Forall other
audio systems, use TUNE-SEEK.

SEEK-TUNE: Press the right arrow to seek to the next
selection. Press the left arrow to search forthe previous
track selection. The sound will mute while seeking.
TUNE-SEEK: When this button is pressed, it has two
positions. Thisbutton works the same, whether it is
pressed to the first orsecond position. Press this
button to seek to thenext or previous selection on the
compact disc.
SCAN: Press this button. You will hear the first few
seconds for the first track on each disc. Pressthis button
again to stop scanning. (This button is available
on the
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Playeronly.)
TRACK SCAN: Press SCAN for lessthan two seconds.
You will hear the first-few seconds of each track on a
disc. Press SCAN again to stop TRACK SCAN. The CD
will mute while scanning and SCAN will appear on the
display. (This function is not available on the AM-FM
Stereo with Cassette Tape Player.)

DISC SCAN: When you press SCAN formore than two
seconds, you will hear the first few seconds
of the first
track on each disc. Press SCAN again to stop DISC
SCAN. The CD will mute while scanningand SCAN
will appear on the display. (This functionis not available
on the AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape Player.)

RDM: Press this button to hear the tracks in random.

Compact Disc Changer Errors

rather than sequential,order. RANDOM will appear
on the display. Press TUNE-SEEK while RDM is on
the display torandomly seek through discs and tracks.
Press RDM again to turn off random play. (This button
is not available on the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette
Tape Player.)

CD CHANGER ERROR could be displayed for
the following:
0

The road is too rough. The disc should play when the
road is smoother.

0

The disc is dirty. scratched, wet or loaded label
side up.

0

The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.

SIDE: Press this button to select the next disc in the
changer. If your vehicle isequipped with the AM-FM
Stereo with Cassette Tape P1aye.r. CD and the disc
number will appear on the displayeach time you press
this button. If your vehicle is equipped with any other
audio system, DISC LOADINGwill appear on the
display and the disc number on the radio display will
go
to that of the next availableCD each time you press
this button.

SOURCE: Press this button to select a source.The
audio source must be loaded to play. If none of the audio
sources are loaded,NO SOURCE LOADED will appear
on the display. Press this button again or BAND to
switch back to the radio. (CD will be displayed for a
few seconds instead on the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette
Tape Player, then the radio will play.)

CD CHANGER DOOR OPEN is displayed when the
CD changer door is left open. (CHEK DOOR will be
displayed instead on the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette
Tape Player.) Completely close the changer door to
restore normal operation.

If any error occursrepeatedly or if an error cannotbe
corrected, please contact your dealer.

EJECT Slide theCD changer door all the way open
and the disc holderwill automatically eject.

3-31

CD Adapter Kits
It is possibleto use a CD adapter kit with your cassette
tape player after activating thebypass feature on your
tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
0

Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
Turn the radio off.
Press and hold the SOURCE button for two seconds.
The tape symbol on the display will flash three
times, indicating the feature isactive.

0

Insert the adapter.

This override routinewill remain active until EJECT
is pressed.

Radio Personalization(If Equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player and 1 (H or A) or 2 (H or A)
appears in the display when the radio is first turnedon,
your vehicle is equipped with this feature.If your
vehicle is equipped with any other audio system and
DRIVER 1 (HOME or AWAY) PRESETS or DRIVER 2
(HOME or AWAY) PRESETS appears in the display
when the radio is first turned on, your vehicle is
equipped with this feature.

3-32

With this feature, your vehcle will recall the latest radio
settings as adjusted the last time your vehicle was
operated. This feature allows two different drivers to
store and recall their own radio settings. The settings
recalled by the radio are determined by which RKE
transmitter (“1” or “2”) was used to enter the vehicle.
The number on the back of the RKE transmitter
corresponds to driver 1 or to driver 2. The radio settings
will automatically adjust to where they were last set by
the identified driver. The settings can also be recalled by
briefly pressing the memory seat buttons 1 or 2 located
on the driver’s door.
Your radio can store home and away presets. Home and
away presets allow you to use one set of preset radio
settings in the area where you live, and another set when
you go out of town. That way, you will not need to
reprogram your presets every time you travel. With the
radio off and the clock displayed, use FF and RW to
select home or away presets. To select the away presets,
press and hold FF for five countsuntil you hear a beep.
The next time the radio comes on, the away presets will
be active. To select the home presets, press and hold RW
for five countsuntil you hear a beep.The next time the
radio comes on, the home presets will be active.

Theft-Deterrent Feature

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

THEFTLOCK@is designed to discourage theftof your
radio. Your vehicle has a “built-in” theft-deterrent
feature on each radio that is automatic -- there is no
programming required. The radioin your vehicle cannot
be used in any other vehicle. When the radio was
originally installed in your vehicle at the factory, it
stored the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Each
time the ignition is turned on, the VIN is verified. If the
vehicle’s VIN does notmatch the VIN stored in the
radio, the radio will THEFTLOCK. If the radio is
removed from your vehicle, the original VIN in the
radio can be used to trace the radio back to your vehicle.

Some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the following:

VOLUME: Press the
up arrow lever to
increase volume and
the down arrow lever
to decrease volume.

3-33

SELECT When listening to the radio,press the up or
down arrow lever to tune to thenext or previous preset
radio station.(If your vehicle is equipped with the
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player, factory
presets which have not been reprogrammed with your
stations will be ignored). When listening to a cassette
tape, the upor down arrow lever can be used to SEEK
forward and rearward through the tape. Pressing the up
or downarrow lever when listening to a CD will cause
the player to go to the next or previous selection. When
in Radio Data Systems (RDS) Program Type (PTY)
mode, the up or down arrow lever can beused to
perform a PTY preset seek. PSEEK will appear on the
display while the PTY preset seek is performed. The
radio will seek all of the PTYs stored in presets, except
for thePTY Any.

Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range formost AM stations is greater than for F M ,
especially atnight. The longer range,however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like stormsand power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce thisnoise if you ever get it.

FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go.

Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until it istoo late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud
and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radio toa safe
sound level beforeyour hearing adaptsto it.

3-34

r
r
I

To help avoid hearing lossor damage:
0

Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.

0

Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.

NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle like a tape player, CBradio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very
important todo it properly. Addedsound
equipment may interfere with the operationof
your vehicle’s engine, radio or other systems, and
even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment
that has been added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer andbe sure tocheck Federal rules
covering mobileradio andtelephone units.

--

r
r
L

r
f

--

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularlycan cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases awayfrom contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat.If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failureof the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly afterevery
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN or
CLEAN TAPE to indicate thatyou have used your tape
player for50 hours without resetting the tape clean
display, your
timer. If this message appears on the
cassette tapeplayer needs tobe cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should cleanit as soon as possible to
prevent damage to your tapes
and player. If you notice a
reduction insound quality, try a known good cassette to
at fault. If this other
see if it is thetape or the tape player
cassette has no improvement insound quality, clean the
tape player.
The recommended cleaningmethod for your cassette
tape player isthe use of a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassettewith pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassetteturn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available
through
your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789).

3-35

When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning
because
cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject
your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature
and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape. To
prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected, usethe
following steps.

1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.

2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the SOURCE button for two
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
three times.
4. Turn the radio on and insert the scrubbing action
cleaning cassette.

5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape
detection featureis active again.

You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This typeof cleaning cassettewill not
eject on itsown. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing typecleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.

3-36

If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player, press and hold EJECT for five
seconds to reset the CLN indicator after you clean the
player. The radio will display --- to show the indicator
was reset.
If your vehicle isequipped with any other radio, press
and hold EJECT for three seconds to reset the CLEAN
TAPE indicator after you clean the player. The radio will
display CLEANTAPE MSG CLEARED to show the
indicator was reset.

Cassettes are subjectto wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.

Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or otherprotective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, softcloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the holeand the outer edge.

Care of Your Compact Disc Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs isnot advised, due to
the risk of contaminating thelens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

I NOTICE:
Don't lubricate the power antenna. Lubrication
could damage it.

Power Antenna Mast Care
Your power antenna will look its best and work well
if it's cleaned from time to time. To clean the
antenna mast:

1. Turn on the ignition and radio to raise the antenna.
2. Dampen a clean cloth with mineral spirits or
equivalent solvent.

3. Wipe the cloth over the mast sections, removing
any dirt.

4. Wipe dry with a clean cloth.

5. Make the antenna go up and down by turning the
radio or ignitionoff and on.
6. Repeat if necessary.

NOTICE:
Before entering an automatic car wash, turn off
your radio tomake the power antenna go down.
This will prevent the mast from possibly getting
damaged. If the antenna does notgo down when
you turn the radio off, it may be damaged or
need to be cleaned. In either case, lowerthe
antenna by hand by carefully pressingthe
antenna down.
If the mast portion of your antenna isdamaged, you can
easily replace it. Seeyour dealer fora replacement kit
and follow the instructionsin the kit.

3-37

b%

3-38

NOTES

@
II

NOTES

3-39

$20 NOTES

3-40

b

NOTES

3-41

NOTES

3-42

I_

Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about drivingon different kindsof roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.

4- 2
4- 3
4- 6
4- 6
4- 10
4- 13
4- 13
4- 15
4- 16

Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving at Night

4- 18
4- 20
4- 21
4- 22
3- 23
4- 24
4- 25
4- 30
4- 32

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer

4-1

Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about drivingis:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device In your
Cadillac: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers aregoing to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Beready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable
of accidents. Yet theyaare common. Allow enough
following distance.It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.

4-2

Death and injury associated with drinkingand driving
is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.

The obvious way to solve thishighway safety problem
is for peoplenever to drink alcohol and then drive. But
what if people do?How much is “toomuch” if the
driver plans to drive?It’s a lot less than many might
think. Although it dependson each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.

Alcohol affects four thingsthat anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:

Drunken Driving

Judgment

The amount of alcohol consumed

Muscular Coordination

The drinker’s body weight

Vision

The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking

Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost
half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. Inmost cases,
these deathsare the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, over 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearlyhalf the adult
population -- choose never to drink alcohol,
so they
never drive after drinking. For persons
under 21, it’s
against the lawin every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.

The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg)person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. Theperson would reach the
same BAC by drinking three4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1- 1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor likewhiskey, gin or vodka.

4-3

Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of 0. I O percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all
commercial drivers in the United States is0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0. IO percent afterthree to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how
quickly the person drinks them.

It’s the amount of alcohol that counts.For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) withinan hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or during drinking
will have a
somewhat lowerBAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
a lower relativepercentage of body water than men.

4-4

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of
many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for driverswho have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink.No amount of coffee or numberof cold
showers will speed that up. ‘‘I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts intothe street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinkingand driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse. especially injuries to the brain, spinal cordor
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger-- is in a crash, that
person‘s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.

A CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious or
even fatal collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink anddrive or ridewith a driver
who has been drinking. Ride home ina cab; or if
you’re with a group, designate a driver who will
not drink.

--

--

4-5

Control of a Vehicle

Braking

You have three systems that make your vehicle go where

Braking action involvesperception time and
reaction time.

you want it togo. They are the brakes, the steeringand
the accelerator. All three systems haveto do their work
at the placeswhere the tires meet the road.

.........
.......
. .. .. .. ..
,

P

-4

L

First, you have to decide to
push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have tobring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 314 of a second. But
that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as longas two or three seconds or
more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugsand
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, avehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That couldbe a lotof distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough spacebetween your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances
vary greatly
with the surfaceof the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the conditionof your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.

Sometimes, aswhen you’re driving on snow or ice,it’s
easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control
of your vehicle.

4-6

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keepingpace with traffic. This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the
you will
traffic and allow realistic following distances,
eliminate a lotof unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.

If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake, Once the powerassist is
used up, it may take longer to stop
and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.

Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on, and you may even notice that your brake
pedal moves a little. Thisis normal.
If there’s a problem with the
anti-lock brake system, this
warning light will stay on.
See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in
the Index.

4-7

The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
fdster than any driver could. Thecomputer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and
road conditions.

."

ii

Here's how anti-lock works. Let's say the road is wet.
You're driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in
front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here's what happens with ABS.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will

separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.

4-8

You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.

Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance.If you get too closeto the vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
reengage the cruise control. (See “Cruise Control”
in
the Index.)

Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may hear the
anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feel the brake
pedal pulsate, but this is normal.

Traction Control System
Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits wheel
spin. This is especially usefulin slippery road conditions.
The system operates onlyif it senses that one or both of
the front wheelsare spinning or beginning to lose traction.
When this happens, the system works the front brakes and
reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
The TRACTION ENGAGEDmessage will display on
the Driver Information Centerwhen the traction control
system is limiting wheel spin. See ‘.Driver Infomation
Center Messages” in the Index. You may feel or hear the
system working, but this is normal.

TRACTION
CONTROL

This warning light will
come on to let you know if
there’s a problem with your
traction control system.

See “Traction Control System Warning Light” in the
Index. When this warning light is on. the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever need to. (You
should turn the system off if your vehicle ever getsstuck
in sand, mud, ice orsnow. See “Rocking Your Vehicle”
in the Index.)

4-9

To turn the system off,
press the TRAC OFF
button located inside of
the glove box.

Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.

Steering
Power Steenng
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.

The TRACTION OFF message will display on the
Driver Information Center. If the system is limiting
wheel spin when you press the button, the TRACTION
OFF message will display -- but the system won’t turn
off right away. It will wait until there’s no longer a
current need to limit wheel spin.
You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing
the button again. The TRACTION READY message
should display briefly on the Driver Information Center.

4-10

Magnasteer

TFr‘

This system continuously adjusts the effort you feel
when steering at all vehicle speeds. Itprovides ease
when parking yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.

Steering Tips
Driving on Curves

It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path
when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction.If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and theroad surface, the angle
at which the curveis banked, and your speed.
While you’re ina curve, speed is theone factor you
can control.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and
acceleration -- have to do their work wherethe tires meet

the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control. Refer to
“Traction Control System” in the Index.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the
accelerator pedal, steer the vehiclethe way you want it
to go, and slow down.
If you have Stabilitrak, you may see the STABILITY
ENGAGED message on the Driver Information Center.
See “Stability Engaged Message” in the Index.
Speed limit signs near curveswarn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.

4-11

Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over ahill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or acar suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or achild darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you can’t: there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action -- steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in
Emergencies’?earlier in this section.) It is better to
remove as much speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steerquickly, and
just asquickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations arealways
possible is a good reason to practice defensive drivingat
all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-12

Off-Road Recovery

Passing

You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.

The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again.A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, ora brief surrender to frustration or angercan
suddenly put thepassing driver face to facewith the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.

So here are sometips for passing:
edge of paved surface

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly belowthe
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then,if there is nothing in the way, steerso
that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You
can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the
right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your
steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

“Drive ahead.” Look down the road. to the sides and to
crossroads for situations that might affect your passing
patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about
making a successful pass, waitfor a better time.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken
center line usually indicates it’s all rightto pass
(.providing the road aheadis clear). Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems emptyof approaching traffic.

4-13

Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if the
vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t
get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.

4-14

Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into theright lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away fromyou
than it really is.)
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down o r starting to turn.
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to theright.

Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three controlsystems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’thave enough friction where the
tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and
constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.

Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid mostskids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving“
those conditions. But skidsare always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the brakingskid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causestires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid
only the acceleration skid.
If your traction control system isoff, then an
acceleration skidis also best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle startsto slide, ease yourfoot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the
vehicle to go.If you start steering quicklyenough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always beready for a
second skid if it occurs.
If you have Stabilitrak, you may see the STABILITY
ENGAGED message on the Driver InformationCenter.
See “Stability Engaged Message” in the Index.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance willbe longer and
vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surfacewith reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, accelerationor
braking (including engine brakingby shifting to alower
gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning
clues -- such as enough water, ice orpacked snow on
the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.

4-15

Here are some tips on night driving.

Driving at Night

.

......., . ........, . ... ....

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reasonis that some drivers arelikely to be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs,with night vision
problems, orby fatigue.

4-16

0

Drive defensively.

0

Don’t drink and drive.

0

Since you can’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.

0

Slow down; especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.

0

In remote areas, watch for animals.

0

If you’re tired, pull .off the road in a safe place and rest.

Night Vision
No one can seeas well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older thesedifferences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may requireat least twice as much light to see the
same thing atnight as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don‘t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare fromheadlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take asecond or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from adriver who
doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.

Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far lessof a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and
aren’t even aware of it.

4-17

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roaas can mean ariving trouble. On a wet
road, you can‘t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t asgood as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.

It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking ormissing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.

4-18

A CAUTION:

I

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t
work
as well in a quickstop and may cause pulling to
one side. You could lose controlof the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle
of water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.

Hydroplaning

Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.

Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little orno contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standingon
the road. If you can see reflectionsfrom trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface. there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

City Driving

NOTICE:
If you drive too quicklythrough deep puddles or
standing water, water can come inthrough your
engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Neverdrive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you
can’t avoid deeppuddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.

some Other Rainy Weather Tips
0

0

Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle.Allow yourself .more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. (See
“Tires” in the Index.)

4-20

L

One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

Freeway Driving

Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city mapand plan your trip into an
unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the
next part. “Freeway Driving.”)
Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light
is there because the corner is busy enough to need it.
When a light turns green, and just before you start
to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.

Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes orsuperhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.

4-21

The most important advice on freeway drivingis: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers are driving.Too-fast or
too-slow drivingbreaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left laneon a freeway as apassing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clearview of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gapat close to
the prevailingspeed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blendsmoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rateif it’s slower. Stay
in the right laneunless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, checkyour mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just beforeyou leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.

4-22

Once you are moving on the freeway, make certainyou
allow a reasonable following distance.Expect to move
slightly slowerat night.
When you want to leave the freeway,
move to the proper
lane well in advance.If you m i s s your exit, do not,
under any circumstances, stopand back up. Drive on to
the next exit.
The exit ramp can
be curved, sometimes quitesharply.
The exitspeed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according toyour speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving forany distance
at higher speeds,you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’reready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after aday’s
work -- don’t plan to make toomany miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothingand shoes you
can easily drivein.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained. it's ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course.
you'll find experienced and able service experts in
Cadillac dealerships ail across North America. They'll
be ready and willing to help if you need it.

Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as "highway hypnosis"?
Or is it just plain t'alling asleep at the wheel? Cali it
highway hypnosis, lackof awareness, or whatever.

0

Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean insideand outside'?

0

Wiper Blcrdes: Are they in good shape?

There is something aboutan easy stretch of road with the
same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road,
the drone of the engine. and the rush of the wind against
the vehicle thdt can make you sleepy. Don't let it happen
to you! If it does. your vehicle can leave the roadin less
t h a ~second,
~ and you could crash and be injured.

0

Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First,be
aware that it can happen.

0

Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean'?

Then here are some tips:

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

a Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving?Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure'?
0 Wenfher-Forecusts: What's the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system?
a Mups: Do you have up-to-date maps?

0

Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortabiy cool interior.

Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to
the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.

a If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service
or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise. or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as
an emergency.

4-23

Hill and Mountain Roads

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
0

Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and alsothe brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.

0

Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your enginedo some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gearwhen you go
down a steep or long hill.

I A CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.

4-24

If you don’t shiftdown, your brakes could get
so hot thatthey wouldn’t work well.You would
or even none going
then have poor braking
down a hill.You could crash. Shift down to let
on a steep
your engine assist your brakes
downhill slope.

L

r
I

r

i

I A CAUTION:

Winter Driving

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down. They could get
so
hot that they wouldn’t work well.You would then
have poor braking or even none going down
a
You could crash. Always have your engine
running
and your vehicle in gear when you godownhill.

hill.

Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transaxle, and you can climb thehdl better.

r

I

Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills ormountains. Don’t swing wide orcut
across the centerof the road. Drive at speedsthat let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the topof a hill,be alert. There couldbe
something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.

f
I

i

P
i
I

You may see highway signs on mountains that warnof
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.

Here are some tips for winter driving:
Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.

~

4-25

Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or icebetween your tires and
the road. you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight,a red cloth and a
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will
be driving under severe conditions, includea small bag
of sand, apiece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.

4-26

Y

d

L

What’s the worst time for this?“Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
Keep your traction control system on. It improves your
ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road.
Even though your vehicle has a traction control system,
you’ll want to slow downand adjust your driving to the
road conditions. See “Traction Control System” in
the Index.

Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping soonerthan you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
0

Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, icepatches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve oran overpass may
remain icy when the surrounding roadsare clear. If
you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake beforeyou
are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on
the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.

4-27

If You're Caught in a Blizzard

Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you've been stopped by the snow.

Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing,make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation.You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for surethat you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to doto summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
0 Turn on your hazard flashers.

4-28

I

-

.

-

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

I

I A CAUTION:
Snow cantrap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome youand kill
you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especiallyany
that is blockingyour exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a windowjust a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s awayfrom the wind. This will help
keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine. make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signalinglater on
with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engineagain
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. Butdo it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as longas you can. To help keep warm,you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.

4-29

Loading Your Vehicle

[@

TIRE-LOADING INFORMATION
OCCUPANTS
VEHICLE CAP, WT.
FRT.
CTR.
RR.
TOTAL LBS.
KG

MAX. LOADING & GVWR SAME AS VEHICLE
CAPACITY WEIGHT
XXX
COLD
TIRE
SPEED
PRESSURE
TIRE SIZE
RTG
PSL’KPa
FRT.
RR.
SPA.
IF TIRESARE HOT, ADD 4PS1!28KPa
SEE OWNER‘S MANUAL FOR ADDITlONAL

\INFORMATION

Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it
may properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information label
found on the driver’sdoor tells you the proper size,
speed rating and recommended inflation pressures for
the tires on your vehicle. It also gives you important
information aboutthe number of people that can be in
your vehicle and the total weight that you can carry.
This weight is called the Vehicle Capacity Weight and
includes the weight of all occupants, cargoand all
options not installed in the
factory.

MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP
DATE
GVWR
GAWR FRT
GAWR

RR

THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE U S . FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE
SAFETY, BUMPER, AND THEFT PREVENTION
STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF
MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.

The other label is the Certification label. found on the
rear edge of the drives’s door. It tells you the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle, calledthe GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes
the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
If you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out.
Don’t carry more than 176 lbs. (80 kg) in your trunk.

~

b

~~

A CAUTION:

A CAUTION:
~~

!
b

Do not loadyour vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either themaximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do,parts on your vehiclecan
break, or itcan change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause
you to lose control.
Also, overloading can shorten the lifeof
your v,ehicle.

f-

I NOTICE:

r
i

r
f

Your warranty does not coverparts or
components that fail because of overloading.
If you put things insideyour vehicle -- like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else -- they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash,they’ll keep going.

Things you put inside your vehiclecan strike
and injurepeople ina sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
0 Put things in the trunkof your vehicle. In a
trunk, putthem as far forward as you can.
Try to spread theweight evenly.
Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them are
above the tops of the seats.
Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
When you carry something insidethe
vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

Electronic Level Control
This feature keeps the rear
of your vehicle levelas the
load changes. It’s automatic -- you don’t need to
adjust anything.

4-31

Towing a Trailer

fuel economy. Successful, safetrailering takes correct
equipment, and it has to be used properly.

A CAUTION:
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a
trailer. For example,if the trailer is too heavy, the
brakes may not workwell or even at all. You
and your passengers could
be seriously injured.
You may also damage yourvehicle; the resulting
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the
steps in thissection. Ask your dealer for advice
and information about towing
a trailer with
your vehicle.

--

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what the
vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer’’
that appears later in this section. But trailering is
different than just drivingyour vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, durability and

4-32

That’s the reason for this part. In it aremany
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for
your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine is
required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under
greater loads,generating extra heat. What’s more, the
trailer adds considerably towind resistance, increasing
the pulling requirements.

If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here aresome important points:
There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be state or provincial police.
Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer aboutsway controls.

0

0

0

Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 kmj your new vehicle is driven.Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 k m ) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over50 mph (80 km/h)and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers (or no more than 55 mph (90 km/hj) to
save wear on your vehicle’s parts.

Three important considerationshave to do with weight:
0

the weight of the trailer,

0

the weight of the trailer tongue

0

and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.

Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh morethan 1,000 lbs. (450 kg) if
you have an Eldorado or 3,760 lbs. (1 709 kg) if you
have an Eldorado ETC. These are total maximum weights
including the load. But even that can betoo heavy.
If you tow more than 1000 lbs. (450 kg), use trailer
brakes. Be sure to followthe instructions that come with
the trailer or frombrake manufacturer.
It depends onhow you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed. altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to
pull a trailer areall important. And, it can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
The maximum trailer weight for your vehicle can be
determined from the Gross Combined Vehicle Weight
(GCVW). TheGCVW = curb weight + passenger’s
weight + cargo weight + trailer weight. The GCVW
should never weigh more than 7,900 lbs. (3 591 kg) total
loaded vehicle and trailer.

4-33

You can ask your dealer for ourtrailering information or
advice, or you can write us at:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 436004
Pontiac, MI 48343-6004
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 ColonelSam Drive
Oshawa, OntarioL l H 8P7

A

B

Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A)of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total gross
weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo you may carry in it. and the people who will be
riding in the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must
add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle
will be carrying that weight, too. See“Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index for more information about your
vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

4-34

If you’re using a weiiht-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B). If you have a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to getthem right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires.You’ll find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information labelat the rear edge of the
driver’s door or see “Loading Your Vehicle” in the
Index. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW
limit for your vehicle, includingthe weight of the
trailer tongue.

Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a
few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
0

Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do,
then be sure to sealthe holes laterwhen you remove
the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your
vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index). Dirt
and water can, too.

Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
And, never allow safety chains to dragon the ground.

If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg), be sure to use a
properly mounted, weight-distributing hitch and
sway control of the proper size. Thisequipment is
very important forproper vehicle loadingand good
handling when you’re driving.

4-35

Trailer Brakes
Because you have anti-lock brakes, don’t try to tap
into your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you do,
both brake systems won’t work well, or at all. If you
tow more than 1000 lbs. (450 kg), use trailer brakes.Be
sure to follow the instructions that come with the trailer
or from brake manufacturer.
Be sure toread and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able toinstall, adjust and maintain
them properly.

Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting outfor the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longerand not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.

4-36

Before you start, check the trailerhitch and platform
(and attachments),safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controllerby hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the sametime.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure,and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.

Following Distance
Stay at leasttwice as farbehind the vehicleahead as you
would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This
can help you avoid sithations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.

Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much fartherbeyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

Backing Up

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right,move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.

When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your Cadillac dealer. The green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn
or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps
will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes or stop.

Making Turns

I NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailer to comein contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other
objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal
well in advance.

When towing a trailer, the green arrows on your
instrument panelwill flash for turnseven if the bulbs on
the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.

Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steepdowngrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 k m h ) or less to reduce the
possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.

4-37

Parking on Hills
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer
attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig
could start to move. People can be injured,and both
your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.
But if you everhave to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P).
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes.Then shift into
PARK (P) firmly and apply your parking brake.
5. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:

Start your engine;

4-38

Shift into a gear; and
a Be sure the parking brake has released.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially importantin trailer
operation areautomatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil,belt, cooling system and brake adjustment.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index
will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s
a good idea toreview these sections beforeyou start
your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operatingconditions. See “Engine Overheating”
in the Index.

NOTES

4-39

&I

4-40

NOTES

@bNOTES

4-41

b

4-42

NOTES

Section 5 Problems on the Koad
Here you'll find what to
do about some problems that can occur
on the road.

5-2
5-3
5-3
5-8
5- 15

Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating

If a Tire GoesFlat
Changing
Flat
a
Tire
5-34
Compact
Spare
Tire
5-35
If You're Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow

5-24
5-24

5-1

Hazard Warning Flashers

Press the button in td make your front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off.

Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

This light on the instrument
panel will flash, indicating
that the hazard warning
flashers are on.

The hazard warning flashers will work once the button
is pressed in regardless of the key position.

5-2

I

Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicleand some jumper cablesto start your
vehicle. Please follow the steps below to do it safely.

A CAUTION:
Pull out on the collar to turn the flashers off. When the
hazard warning flashers are on,the turn signals won't
work since they are already flashing.

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
0 They contain acid that can burn you.
0 They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
0 They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you don't follow these steps exactly, some
or all
of these thingscan hurt you.

Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles,you can set one up
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.

5-3

NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costlydamage
to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling
it won’t work,and itcould damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.

I NOTICE:
If the other system isn’ta 12-volt system witha
negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could causea ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able
to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could
damage theelectrical systems.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter. Turn off all lamps that aren’t needed as well
as radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both
batteries. In addition, it could saveyour radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find
the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on
each battery.

1A
~

~~~~~

~

CAUTION:
~

An electric fan can start upeven when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools awayfrom any underhood
electric fan.

5-4

5 . Start by removing the
red positive (+)
terminal cover.

A CAUTION:
Using a match neara battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded.
Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
You don’t
Be sure the battery has enough water.
need to add water to the
Delco Freedom@ battery
installed in every newGM vehicle. But if a
battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount
of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take
care of that first.If you don’t, explosive gas
could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get itin
your eyesor on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.

5-5

6. Check that the jumper cables don't have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could also bedamaged.
Before you connect the cables,here are some basic
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) and negative (-) will go to an unpainted
metal enginepart or a body metal surface. Don't
connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you will get a
short that would damage the battery and maybe other
parts, too. Also, don't connect negative (-) to
negative (-).

I A CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you
badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts
once the engine is running.

5-6

7 . Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+>
terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery.

8. Don't let the other end
of the positive cable
touch metal. Connect
it to the positive(+)
terminal of the
good battery.

9. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery's
negative (- j terminal.

Don't let the other end of the negative (-) cable touch
anything until the next step. The other end of the
negative ( - ) cable duvsn 'Igo to the dead battery. It
goes to a heavy unpainted metal part on the engine of
the vehicle with the dead battery.

10. Attach the cable at least
18 inches (46 cm) away
from the dead battery,
but not near engine
parts that move. The
electrical connection is
just as good there, but
the chance of sparks
getting back to the
battery is much less.

11. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for awhile.
,,

./

12. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.
If it won't start after afew tries, it probably
needs service.

5-7

Towing Your Vehicle

13. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent
electrical shorting.Take care that they don’t touch
each otheror any other metal.

1

Try to have a GM dealer or a professional towing
service tow your vehicle. See “Roadside Service” in
the Index.

If your vehicle has been changed or modified since it
was factory-new by adding aftermarket items like fog
lamps, aero skirting or special tires and wheels, these
instructions may not be correct.
Before you do anything, turn on the hazard
warning flashers.
When you call, tell the towing service:
That your vehicle has front-wheel drive.
The make, model’and year of your vehicle.
0

Whether you can still move the shift lever.

If there was an accident, what was damaged.
A. Heavy Metal Engine Part

B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery

When the towing service arrives, letthe tow operator
know that thismanual contains towing instructions
and illustrations. The operator may want to see them.

A CAUTION:

Front Towing

To help avoid injury to you or others:
0 Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is
being towed.
Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.
Never tow with damaged parts not
fully secured.
0 Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by the tow truck.
0 Always secure the vehicle on each side with
separate safety chains when towing it.
0 Never use J-hooks. Use only T-hooksin the
front T-hook slots and only R-hooksin the
rear R-hook slots.

Rear Towing

5-9

A vehicle can fallfrom a car carrierif it isn’t
adequately secured. This can causea collision,
serious personal injury and vehicle damage. The
with chains or
vehicle should be tightly secured
steel cables before it transported.
is
Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps,
canvas webbing, etc.) that can becut by sharp
edges underneath the towed vehicle. Always use
T-hooks inserted inthe front T-hook slots or
R-hooks inserted inthe rear R-hook slots. Never
use J-hooks. They will damage drivetrain and
suspension components.

5-10

When your vehicle is being towed, have the ignition key
turned to OFF. The steering wheel should be clamped in
a straight-ahead position, with a clamping device
designed for towing service. Do not use the vehicle’s
steering column lock for this. The transaxle should be in
NEUTRAL (N) and the parking brake released.
Don’t have your vehicle towed on the drivewheels
unless you must. If the vehicle must be towed on the
drive wheels,be sure to follow the speed and distance
restrictions laterin this section or your transaxle will be
damaged. If these limitations must be exceeded,then the
drive wheels have to be supported on a dolly.

Front Towing
Tow Limits -- 35 mph (55 kplz), 25 miles (40 km)

L‘

NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling typeequipment or
fascidfog lamp damage will occur. Use wheel-lift
or car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping
may be required for car-carrierequipment. Use
safety chains and wheel straps.
Towing a vehicle over roughsurfaces could
damage a vehicle. Damage can occur from
vehicle toground or vehicle to wheel-lift
equipment. To help avoid damage,install a
towing dollyand raise the vehicle until adequate
clearance is obtained between the ground andor
wheel-lift equipment.
Do not attach winch cablesor J-hooks to
suspension componentswhen using car-carrier
equipment. Always use T-hooks inserted in the
T-hook slots.

5-11

r

!
I

Attach T-hook chains on both sides, in the slotted holes
in the bottom of the frame rails,behind the front wheels.
These slots are to be usedwhen loading and securing to
car-carrier equipment.

5-12

Attach a separate safety chain around the outboard end
of each lower control arm.

r
L

r

Rear Towing
Tow Limits -- 35 mph (55 kph), 25 miles (40 km)

NOTICE:

r
r

Do not tow with slingtype equipment or rear
bumper valance damage will occur. Use wheel-lift
or car-carrier equipment. Additionalramping
may berequired for car-carrier equipment. Use
safety chains and wheel straps.
Towing a vehicle overrough surfaces could
damage a vehicle. Damage can occur from
vehicle to ground or vehicle to wheel-lift
equipment. To help avoid damage,install a
towing dollyand raise the vehicle until adequate
clearance is obtained between the ground and/or
wheel-lift equipment.
Do not attach winch cables or J-hooks to
suspension components when using
carcarrier
equipment. Always use R-hooksinserted in
the R-hook slots.

r
I

5-13

f

r

Attach R-hook chains to the R-hook slots in the frame
rails just ahead of the rear wheels on both sides. These
slots are to beused when loading and securing to
car-carrier equipment.

5-14

Attach a separate safety chain around the end of each
axle inboard of the spring.

Engine Overheating
You will find an ENGINE COOLANTHOT, IDLE
ENGINE message or an ENGINE OVERHEATED,
STOP ENGINE message on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). You will also hear a chime. Thereis also
an engine temperaturewarning light and/or gageon the
instrument panel. See “Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light” or “Engine Coolant Temperature Gage”
in the Index.

Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
Should an overheated engine condition existand the
message ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE is
displayed, an overheat protection mode which alternates
firing groupsof four cylinders helps prevent engine
damage. In this mode, you will notice a lossin power

and engine performance.This operating mode allows
your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an
emergency; you may drive up to 50 miles (80 km).
Towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode
should be avoided.
-~

NOTICE:
After driving in the overheated engine protection
operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow
the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oilwill be severelydegraded. Repair
the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset
the oil life indicator. See “Engine Oil, When to
Change” in the Index.

5-15

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

L

5-16

A CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you
badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away
from the engineif you see or hear steamcoming
from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign
of steam or coolant before
you
open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine
is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch
fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop your engine
if
it overheats, and get out
of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.

NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be
covered by your warranty. See “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index.

If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little toohot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for aminute or so:

2 . Dial temperature control to the highest heat setting
and open the windows, as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest
gear while
driving -- OVERDRIVE (0)
or THIRD (3).

If you no longer have the overheat
warning, you can
drive. Just tobe safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t comeback on, you can
drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle rightaway.

If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for two or three rqinutes while you’re parked, to see
if the warning stops. But then, if you still have the
warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of
the vehicle until it cools down.Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection OperatingMode” listed previously
in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.

1. Turn off your air conditioner.

5-17

When you decide it’s safe to lift thehood, here’s what
you’ll see:

A CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.

\

A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap

B. Electric Engine Fans

5-18

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it coolsdown.

. .

”

.

A CAUTION:
Heater and radiatorhoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them.If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engineif there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it couldlose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and
you could be burned.
Get any leakfixed before you drive thevehicle.

If it isn’t, the coolant levelshould be indicated by a
CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message on the Driver
Information Center. If it is, you may have a leak in the
radiator hoses, heater hoses,radiator, water pump or
somewhere else in the cooling system.

NOTICE:
Engine damageif you keep running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to
see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the
engine is overheating,both fans should be running. If
they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.

5-19

How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at the proper level (2.5 inches (6.4 cm) below the
base of the fill neck), add a 50/50mixture of clean
water (preferably distilled) and DEX-COOL@coolant at
the coolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system,
including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool
before you do it. (See “Engine Coolant’‘ in the Index for
more information.)

I

A CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burnyou badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tankpressure cap even a little they
can comeout at high speed. Neverturn the
cap when the cooling system, includingthe
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for thecooling systemand coolant surge tank
pressure cap to coolif you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
-0

5-20

--

Adding onlyplain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous.Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol,can boil beforethe proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’scoolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plainwater or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot
but you wouldn’t
CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire andyou or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean water and
DEX-COOL@coolant.

1 NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freezeand crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. So
use the recommended coolant.

I A CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts arehot
enough. Don't spill coolant on a hot engine.

I . You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, includingthe coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise until it first stops. (Don't press
down while turning the pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.

5-21

,

.:

..

I

2. Then keep turning the cap, but now push down as
you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.

5-22

3. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.

a

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off. start the
engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches about 2.5 inches (6.4 cm)
below the base of the filler neck.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the arrows on
the pressure cap line up like this.
Start the engine and allow it to warm up. If the CHECK
COOLANT LEVEL message does not appear on the
Driver InformationCenter, coolant is at the proper fill
level. If a CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message does
appear, repeat Steps 1 through 3 or see your dealer.

5-23

If a Tire Goes Flat

Changing a Flat Tire

It’s unusual for a tireto “blow out” while you’re driving.
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,”here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.

If a front tire fails, the flat tirewill create a dragthat
pulls the vehicle toward that side.Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steeringwheel firmly.
Steer tomaintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stopwell out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularlyon a curve. acts much like a
skid and may require the samecorrection you’d use in a
skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.

If a tire goes flat,the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire
safely.

5-24

I A CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause an
injury. The vehicle
you or other
can slipoff the jack and roll over
people. You and they could be badly injured.
To help
Find a level place to change your tire.
prevent thevehicle from moving:
1. Put the shift lever in
PARK (P).
2, Set the parking brake firmly.
3. l h r n off the engine.
To be even more certain thevehicle won’t move,
you can put blocksat the front and rear
of the
tire farthestaway from the one being changed.
That wouldbe the tire on the other side
of the
vehicle, at the opposite end.

................................................................................
................................................................................
................................................................................
................
.....................................................
..................
................................................................
...........................................
...................
..........................................
.....................
...........................................

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

...................
............................................

The following stepswill tell you how to use the iack and
change atire.

The equipment you’ll need is in the trunk. Pull the
carpeting from the‘floor of the trunk. Turn the retainer
(center dial)on the compact spare cover to the left to
remove it. Lift and remove the cover. (See “Compact
Spare Tire” later in this section for more information
about the compact spare.)

5-25

I
Lift up the tire to remove it from the trunk.

5-26

Turn the nut holding the jack and wheel wrench to the
left and remove it. Then remove the jack and wrench.

Removing the Wheel Cover

r,

i

r
r
I

r-

r
I

~~

~~

The tools you'llbe using include the jack (A) and the
wheel wrench (B).
There is a center wheel cover on the aluminum wheel.
Using the flat end of the wheel wrench, gently pry the
wheel cover off. Be careful not to scratch thealuminum
wheel edge and don'ttry to remove it with your hands.

5-27

Removing the Flat Tire and Installingthe
Spare Tire
4.

/r\ CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle whenit is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slipsoff the jack, you
could be badlyinjured or killed. Never getunder
a vehicle whenit is supported only by a jack.

I A CAUTION:
1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.
Don't remove them yet.

2. Turn the jackhandle to the right to raise the jack lift
head a few inches.

5-28

Raising your vehidewith the jackimproperly
positioned can damagethe vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal
injury andvehicle damage, besure tofit the jack
lift head into the proper location beforeraising
the vehicle,

il
R

1t11.O INCHES
(279mm)

5.5 INCHES
(140 mm)

3. Position the jack under the vehicle and raise the jack
lift head until it fits firmly into the notch in the
vehicle’s frame nearest the flat tire.
Put the compact spare tire near you.

5-29

6. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.

I A CAUTION:
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle to the
right. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground for
the spare tire to fit under the vehicle.
5 . Remove all wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.

5-30

Rust or dirt on thewheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the
wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could come
off and causean accident. Whenyou change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel
to do this; butbe sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later,if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.

A CAUTION:
Never use oilor grease on studs or nuts.If you
do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could
fall off, causing aserious accident.
2.

7 . Replace the wheel nuts
with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the
wheel. Tighten each nut
by hand until the wheel
is held against the hub.

.,

\ I

.r

8. Lower the vehide by rotating the wheel wrench to
the left. Lower the jack completely.

5-31

9. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.

NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotordamage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel
nuts in theproper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
Don’t try to put a wheel cover on your compac’ pare
tire. It won’t fit. Store thewheel cover in the trunk
until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
~

A CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can causethe wheel to become loose
and even comeoff. This could leadto anaccident.
Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts.If you have
to replace them, besure toget new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened witha torque wrench to 100 Ib-ft
(140 Nom).

5-32

NOTICE:
-~

Wheel covers won’tfit on your compact spare. If
you try to put a wheel cover onyour compact
spare, you could damage the cover.or the
compact spare.

Storing the FlatTire and Tools

1A

CAUTION:
~~

Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartmentof the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose
all these
equipment could strike someone. Store
in the proper place.
After you've put the compact spare tire on your vehicle,
you'll need to store the flat tire in your trunk. Use the
following procedure to secure the flat tire in the trunk.
Put the flat tire in the trunk so the side that faces out
when it is on the vehicle is facing down. The full-size
tire will not fit down into the well. Place it so the front
is in the well and the rear is out of the well.
Secure the tire with the retainer that was used to hold
the compact spare in place. Store the cover as far
forward as possible.

Storing the Spare Tireand Tools

A CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment
in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stopor collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store
all these
in the properplace.

5-33

The compact spareis for temporary use only. Replace
the compact spare tirewith a full-size tireas soon as you
can. See the storage instructions label
to replace your
compact spare into your
tfrmk properly.'

SPARE TIRE

WHEEL WRENCH

5-34

7

Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact sparetire was fully inflated
when your vehiclewas new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressureregularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop assoon as possibleand make sure your
spare tire is correctly
inflated. The compact spare is
made to performwell at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distancesup to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have your full-size tire
repaired or replacedwhere you want. Of course, it'sbest
to replace your sparewith a full-size tireas soon as you
can. Your spare willlgst longer and be in good shape in
case you need it again.

r
r
r

r

P

2

r
r

NOTICE:
When the compact spare is installed, don’ttake
your vehiclethrough an automatic car wash with
guide rails.The compact spare canget caught on
the rails.That candamage the tire and
wheel,
and maybe other partsof your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spareon other vehicles.
with
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel
other wheels or tires. Theywon’t fit. Keep your spare
tire and its wheel together.

NOTICE:
Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Using
them can damage your vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on your
compact spare.

If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
What you don’t want to do when your vehicle isstuck is
to spin your wheels too fast. Themethod known as
“rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck,but
you must use caution.

A CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, thetransaxle or other partsof the vehicle
can overheat. That could causean engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you’re
stuck, spinthe wheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.

r

r

5-35

NOTICE:
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts
of your
vehicle as well as the tires.If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transaxle
back and
forth, you can destroy your transaxle.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.

5-36

Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. You should
turn your traction control system off. (See “Traction
Control System” in the Index.) Then shift back and forth
between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the
wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal
while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transaxle is in gear. If that doesn’t get
you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out.
If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your
Vehicle” in the Index.

&

NOTES

5-37

b% NOTES

5-3s

.

..

- .

5-39

4 6 NOTES

5-40

,<+
--\,

Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section beginswith service and fuel infomation,
and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is alsotechnical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-2
6-3
6-5
6-8
6-8
6-1 1
6- 15
6-18
6-22
6-26
6-28
6-3 1
6-32
6-38
6-3 8
6-47
6-47
6-49

Service
Fuel
Filling Your Tank
Filling a Portable Fuel Tank
Checking Things Under the Hood
Engine Oil
Air Cleaner
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Engine Coolant
Windshield Washer Fluid
Brakes
Battery
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Care of Safety Belts

6-50
6-50
6-50
6-50
6-52
6-52
6-52
6-53
6-5 3
6-54
6-55
6-55
6-64
6-64
6-65
6-65

Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield and
Wiper Blades
Weatherstrips
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome Wheels
(If Equipped)
Cleaning Tires
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
Chemical Paint Spotting
Appearance Care Materials Chart
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

6-1

Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll. go to your dealer for
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parrs and
GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle a11 GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Genuine

If you want to do s o m of your own service work, you’ll
want.to use the proper Cadiilac Service Manual. Zt tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this rnanrral can. To order the proper service manual, see
“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempring to
do your own service.work. see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
You should keep a record with ali parts receipts and
list the mileage and the date of any service work w u
perfmm. See “Maintenance Record” in the Mainkmnc.e
Schedule Booklet.

A CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
0 Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused.If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.

Adding Equipmentto the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outsideof
your vehicle.

Fuel
Use premium unleaded gasoline rated at 91 octane or
higher for best performance. You may use middle grade
or regularunleaded gasolines, but your vehicle may not
accelerate as well.
At a minimum, the gasoline you use should meet
specifications ASTM D4814 in the United States and
CGSB 3.5-M93 in Canada. Improved gasoline
specifications have been developed by the American
Automobile Manufacturers Association (AAMA) for
better vehicle performance and engine protection.
Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could
provide improved driveability and emission control
system protection Fompared to other gasolines.
Be sure the posted octane for premium is at least
9 1 (at least 89 for middle grade and 87 for regular).If
the octane is lessthan 87, you may get a heavy knocking
noise when you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage
your engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at the recommended octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service. But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging
noise when you’re acceleratingor driving up a hill.
That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higher

6-3

octane fuel toget rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant
knock that means you have a problem.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control
label), itis designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. If such fuels are not available
in states adopting California emissionsstandards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorilyon fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your
vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs,return
to your authorized Cadillac dealer fordiagnosis to
determine the cause of failure. In the event it is
determined that the cause of the condition isthe type of
fuels used,repairs may not be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolinesthat are not reformulated for low
emissions contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT);
ask your service station operator whether or not his fuel
contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the
use of such gasolines. If fuels containingMMT are used,
spark plug lifemay be reduced and your emission

6-4

control system performance may be affected. The
malfunction indicator lampon your instrument panel
may turn on. If this occurs,return to your authorized
Cadillac dealer for service.

To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent deposits from forming in your engineand fuel
system, allowingyour emission controlsystem to
function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add
anything to the fuel.In addition, gasolinescontaining
oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to
help clean the air. General Motors recommends that you
use these gasolines if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.

I NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designedfor fuel that
can corrode
contains methanol. Don’t use it. It
metal parts in your fuel system and
also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.

Fuels in Foreign Countries

Filling Your Tank

If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’tbe covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact amajor oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.

. ..
. ‘7

You can also write us at the following address for
advice. Justtell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VN).
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario Ll H 8P7

1 A CAUTION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable.It burns
violently, and thatcan cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and
smoking
materials away from gasoline.

6-5

The cap is behind a hinged door on the driver's side of
your vehicle.
The fuel door releaseis
located on console and on
the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.

An alternate fuel door
release is located insideof
the trunk on the left hand
side. Pull it to release the
fuel door.

6-6

While refueling, hang'the cap by the tether from the
hook on the filler door.
To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The caphas a spring in it; if you let
go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right.

r
r
rfI

1 A CAUTION:
If you get gasolineon yourself and then
something ignites it,you could be badlyburned.
Gasoline can spray out
on you if youopen the
fuel fillercap too quickly.This spray can happen
if your tank is nearly full,and is more likely in
hot weather. Openthe fuel filler cap slowlyand
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all the way.
Be carefulnot to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning
the
Outside of Your Vehicle”in the Index.

f1

I“
I

When you put the capback on, turn it tothe right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. See “Malfunction
Indicator Lamp”in the Index.

NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure toget the right
type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get
the wrong type,it may notfit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light
and your fuel tank and emissions systemmay be
damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.

6-7

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

Checking Things Under the Hood

A CAUTION:

A CAUTION:

Never filla portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can
be badly burned and your vehicle damaged ifthis
occurs. To help avoidinjury to you and others:
Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening beforeoperating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.

An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even whenthe engine isnot running.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.

6-8

A CAUTION:
Things that burncan get on hot engine
parts and
start a fire. These includeliquids like gasoline,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washerand
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could be burned. Be careful not to drop orspill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood Release
Pull the lever inside the
vehicle to open the hood. It
is located on the lower left
side of the instrument panel.

Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the
secondary hood release which is located under the front
edge of the grille. Lift up on the release lever as you
raise the hood.

6-9

G. Transaxle DipsticWluid
Fill Location
H. Air Cleaner
I. Windshield Washer Fluid
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
A. Battery
B. Coolant Fill Location
C. Power Steering Fluid

6-10

D. Oil Fill Location
E. Engine Oil Dipstick Location
E Brake Master Cylinder

It's a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

Underhood Lamp
Turn the parking lamps on to operate the underhood
lamp. The underhood lamp will come on when the
hood is opened.

Engine Oil
iMlUM UNLEADED
FUEL ONLY

TRIP

fl fl.

@BMaBUD
..........................
.............
.. ... .... .... ........ .:...; ..i .f ..............
i. .i... . .:-i..: i:
..........................................
.".......
*:

The engine oil dipstick is
located behind the radiator
on the driver's side of the
engine. The black handle
says ENGINE OIL on it.

Turn off the engine and
give the oil a few minutes
to drain back into the oil
pan. If you don't, the oil
dipstick might not show
the actual level.

OIL LEVEL message will appear when the
engine oil is approximately 1 quart (1 L) low. If the
message is displayed, check the dipstick level
and add
oil as needed.

11 CHECK

6-11

Checking EngineOil
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, thenpush it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.

NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil.
If your engine hasso
much oil that the oil levelgets above the upper
mark that showsthe proper operating range,
your engine could be damaged.

A

The oil fill cap is located
behind the radiator on the
passenger’s side of the
engine. Turn the cap to the
left toremove it.

When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the ADD line, then you’ll need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This part explainswhat kind of oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”
in the Index.

6-12

Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Pushthe dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommended foryour vehicle can be identified by
looking for the "Starburst" symbol. This symbol
indicates that the oil has been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which
does not carry this Starburst symbol.

I

If you change your own
oil, be sure you use oil that
has the Starburst symbol
on the front of the oil
container. If you have your
oil changed for you, be sure
the oil put into your engine
is American Petroleum
Institute certified for
gasoline engines.

.

I

I

You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the following chart:

RECOMMENOED SAL VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS

-.

FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTINB, SELECT T&-LOWEST
SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANGE.
I

HOT
WEATHER

I

SAE 1OW-30

I-

PREFERRED
abovo QF
(-18%)

DO NOT USE SA€ 20W-50 OR ANY
OTHERGRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED

6-13

As shown in the chart, SAE 1OW-30 is best for your
vehicle. However, you can use SAE 5W-30 if it’s going
to be colderthan 60°F (16°C) before your next oil
change. When it’s very cold, you should use SAE
5W-30. These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils,
such as SAE 20W-50.

NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
“Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage not
covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench@oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area where the temperature falls
below -20°F (-29”C), consider using either an
SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAEOW-30 oil. Both
will provide easiercold starting and better protection
for your engine at extremely low temperatures.

6-14

Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. Your dealer is ready to
advise if you think something should be added.

When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has an Oil Life Indicator. This feature
will let you know when to change your oil and
filter -- usually between 3,000 miles (5 000 km)and
7,500 miles (12 500 km)since your last oil change.
Under severe conditions,the indicator may come on
before 3,000 miles ( 5 000 km). Never drive your vehicle
more than 7,500 miles (12 500 km)or 12 months
(whichever occurs first)without an oil change.
The system won’t dete.ct dust in theoil. So, if you
drive in a dusty area,be sure to changeyour oil
every 3,000 miles ( 5 000 krn) or sooner. Remember
to reset theOil Life Indicatorwhen the oil has been
changed. Formore information, see “Oil LifeIndicator”
in the Index.

How to Reset the Oil Life Indicator
After the oil has been changed, display the OIL LIFE
LEFT message by pressing the INFO button. Then press
and hold the INFO RESET button until the display
shows “100.” This resets the oil life index. The message
will remain off until the next oil change is needed. The
percentage of oil life remaining may be checked at
any time by pressing the INFO button several times
until the OIL LIFE LEFT message appears. For more
information on the Oil Life feature, see “Oil Life
Indicator” in the Index.

recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. I f
you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil.
ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center forhelp.

Air Cleaner

What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer?Don‘t let used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw
away clothing or rags containingused engine oil. (See
the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.)
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil
from the filter before disposal.Don’t ever dispose of oiI
by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Instead,

The air cleaneris located next to the windshield washer
fluid reservoir on the driver’s side of the engine. Be sure
the engine has cooled before following thesesteps to
replace the air cleaner filter:

6-15

1 -

1. Disconnect the Intake
Air Temperature (IAT)
sensor from the base of
the aircleaner.

2. With a screwdriver,
loosen the air duct
clamp, which is located
at the mass airflow
sensor end of the
air duct.

3 . Disconnect the air duct from the mass airflow sensor.

6-16

4. Unhook both air cleaner cover latches. One latch is
located near the radiator hose (not shown) and the
other latch is located next to the IAT sensor.
5. Pivot the air cleaner and air duct assembly toward
the front of the vehicle. Remove the cover.

Follow these steps to reinstall the air cleaner assembly:

1 . Slide the air cleaner lid into the slots in the front
edge of the air cleaner base.
2. Pivot the air cleaner coverand the air duct assembly
downward. Make sure that both latches are secure
and fully engaged.
3. Reinstall the clean air duct overthe mass airflow
sensor. Make sure that the duct is secure around the
entire outer edgeof the sensor.
4. Tighten the air duct clamp.

5. Reconnect the IAT sensor.

6. Take out the air cleaner filterand remove any
loose debris that may be found laying in the air
cleaner base.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to replace the air filter.
See "Scheduled Maintenance Services" in the
Maintenance Schedule booklet.

7. Install a new air filter element. See "Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts" in the Index.

6-17

A CAUTION:

Automatic Transaxle Fluid

Operating the engine withthe air cleaner off can
cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner
not only cleansthe air, it stops flame if the engine
backfires. If it isn’tthere, and the engine
backfires, you could be burned. Don’t drive with
it off, and be careful working on the engine with
the air cleaner off.

A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the engine oil ischanged.

NOTICE:
If the air cleaner is off, a backfire can cause a
damaging engine fire. And,dirt can easily get
into your engine, which willdamage it. Always
have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving.

6-18

When to Check and Change

Change both the fluid and filter every50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one
or more of these conditions:
0

In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90”F (32O Cj or higher.

0

In hilly or mountainous terrain.

0

When doing frequent trailer towing.

0

Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do notrequire change
until the message CHANGE TRANS FLUID appears
on the Driver Information Center.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the
Maintenance Schedule booklet.

How to Check

In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.

Because this operationcan be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at your Cadillac dealership
Service Department.

While pulling a trailer.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructionshere,or you could get afalsereading
on the dipstick.

NOTICE:

To get the right reading, the fluidshould be at
normal operating temperature,which is 180°Fto
200°F (82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 kmj when outside temperatures areabove
50°F (10"Cj. If it's colder than 50°F (lO°C), you
may have to drivelonger.

Checking the FluidLevel
Too much or too little fluid can damage
your
transaxle. Too much can mean thatsome of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot
engine parts
or exhaust system parts, starting fire.
a Be sure to
get an accurate reading if you check
your
transaxle fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).

Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
With the parlung brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
With vour foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever ihrough each gear range,
pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.

At high speed for quite a while.

6-19

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:

I

3. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
4. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.

.

I

5. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the
cross-hatched area.
1. The black transaxle fluid cap is located next to the

radiator hose and below the air cleanerassembly on
the driver’s sideof the engine. Remove the air
cleaner assembly so you can reach the transaxle fluid
cap. The assembly is attached to the vehicle by two
fasteners. Lift up on the air cleanerassembly to
remove it.
3

L.

Find the transaxle fluid cap and turn it to the left
to remove.

6-20

6. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push
the dipstick back in all the way. Replace the air
cleaner assembly.

How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transaxle fluid to use. See “Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants” in the Maintenance Schedule booklet.

If the fluid level islow, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on
the dipstick.
1 . Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Don’t ovegi’ll.
-

NOTICE:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
is
DEXRON@-111, because fluid with that label
made especiallyfor your automatic transaxle.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON-I11
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.

How to Reset Transaxle Fluid
Change Indicator:
Your vehicle is equipped with a transaxle fluid change
indicator. A CHANGE TRANS FLUID message will
display on the Driver Information Center(DIC) when
the powertrain computer determines thatthe transaxle
fluid needs to be changed or at each 100,000miles
(160 000 km)interval, whichever occurs first. See your
Maintenance Schedule booklet for more information.
When this message appears, change the transaxle fluid
and reset the transaxle fluid life indicator as follows:
1. Turn the ignition on but do not start the engine.

2. Press and hold the OFF and rear defog buttons on
the climate control system at the same timeuntil
the TRANS FLUID RESET message appears on
the DIC.

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under“How to Check.”

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.

6-21

Engine Coolant
The cooling s stem in your vehicle isfilled with
DEX-COOL J engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km) whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL’ extended life coolant.
The following explainsyour cooling system and
how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a
problem with engine overheating, see“Engine
Overheating” in the Index.
A 50/50 mixture of water and DEX-COOL@

coolant will:
0

Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265 “F (1 29°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.

0

Help keep the proper engine temperature.

0

Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.

6-32

NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that
you
use onlyDEX-COOL@(silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOLis added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) o r 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused
by the
is not
use of coolant other than DEX-COOL@
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
-0

What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean water (preferably
distilled) and one-half DEX-COOL” coolant which
won’t damage aluminum parts.If you use this mixture.
you don’t need to add anything else.

A CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the
proper
coolant mixturewill. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but
you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning.
Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean water and
DEX-COOL@coolant.

NOTICE:
If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered
by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater
core and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear,
have your dealer check your cooling system.

I NOTICE:
~~~~~

If you use the proper coolant,you don’t have to
add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to
improve the system. These can be harmful.

6-23

Checking Coolant

A CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
you badly.
scalding liquids to blow out and burn
Never turn the surge tank pressure cap even a
little when the engine and radiator arehot.

--

.
The surge tank is located next to the engineblock on the
passenger's side of the engine.
The cooling system is under a lot of pressure when it
is hot. If the CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message
appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC), you
will need to add coolant.

--

When your engine is cold. the coolant level should be at
the full cold mark, which is 2.5 inches (6.4 cm) below
the base of the fill neck. Use a flashlight as necessary to
see into the tank.

..................................................
..............
. ... .... ... ... ...
......................................
.... ..... .... ... ......... ... ...... ....... ..... .... ................. ............
. .
.....................

If the CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message comes on.
it means you're low on engine coolant.
For more information, see "Check Coolant Level"
message in the Index.

6-24

Adding Coolant

If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture ut the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.

I A CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethyleneglycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant ona hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is tight.

Surge Tank Pressure Cap

NOTICE:
The surge tank cap
is a 15 psi (105 kPa)
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed
to prevent coolantloss and possible engine
damage from overheating. Be sure the arrows
on the cap line up.

If the surge tank pressure cap needs to be replaced, a
GM cap is recommended.

Thermostat
Engine coolant temperatureis controlled by a thermostat
in the engine coolantsystem. The thermostat stopsthe
flow of coolant throughthe radiator until the coolant
reaches a preset temperature.
If your thermostat needs to be replaced. a GM
thermostat is recommended.

6-25

Power SteeringFluid
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located next
to the coolant surge tank
on the passenger’s side

How To Check Power Steering Fluid
When the engine compartment is cool, wipe the cap and
the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and
wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.Replace the cap and
completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and
look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up
to the mark.

What to Use

c
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly
check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected
and repaired.

6-26

To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the
Maintenance Schedule booklet. Always use the
proper fluid. Failure to usethe proper fluid can cause
leaks and damage hoses and seals,

Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure toread
the manufacturer’s instructionsbefore use. if you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use afluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

NOTICE:
0

0

0

The windshield washer fluid reservoir located
is
next
to the air cleaneron the driver’s side of the engine.
Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID ONLY.
Add washer fluid until the tank is full.

0

When usingconcentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other parts of the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t cleanas well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full whenit’s very cold. This
allows for expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damage the tank if it is
completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant(antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.

6-27

Brakes
Brake Fluid

of the brake system. If it is. you should have your brake
system fixed, since a leak means that sooneror later your
brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work
is done on the brake hydraulic system.

I A CAUTION:
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is here. It is filled
with DOT-3 brake fluid.
the
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid
goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake
lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level
goes back up. The other reason is that fluidis leaking out

6-28

If you have too much brake fluid,
it can spill
on the engine.The fluid will burn if the engine
is hot enough.You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when workis done on the brake
hydraulic system.
When your brake fluid falls toa low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See “Brake System Warning
Light” in the Index.

What to Add
When you do need brake fluid. use only DOT-3
brake fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 1 1 ’‘ (GM Part
No. 12377967). Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only.

NOTICE:
0

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.

I A CAUTION:
With the wrong kindof fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work
well, o r they
may not even work at all. This could causea
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

0

Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
a few
brake system parts. For example, just
drops of‘mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system parts so badly thatthey’ll have to
be replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on yourvehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff
immediately. See “Appearance Care”in
the Index.

6-29

Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake
pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving (except when you are pushing on the brake
pedal firmly).

I A CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to
an accident, When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.

NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.

6-30

Some driving conditions or climatesmay cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly torquewheel
nuts in the proper sequence to GM specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of the
Maintenance Schedule booklet under Part C “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections.”

Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust forwear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

Vehicle Storage

The bralung system on a modem vehicle is complex.
Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good braking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system -- for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you have to have new ones put in -- be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you
don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between your front and
rear brakes can change -- for the worse. The braking
performance you’ve come to expect can change in
many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.

If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.

Battery
Every new Cadillac has a Delco Freedom@battery. You
never have to add water to one of these. When it‘s time
for a new battery, we recommend a Delco Freedom
battery. Get one that has the replacement number shown
on the original battery’s label.

I A CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode.You can be badly hurt ifyou
aren’t careful.See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips on working around a battery without
.
getting
hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature’‘ in the Index.

6-31

Headlamps

Bulb Replacement
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contactyour dealer’s service department.

Halogen Bulbs

I A CAUTION:

r
I

I

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured.
Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.

I

I

I

1. To access the headlamps, turn the lock tabs in

the direction of the arrows as shown on the
headlamp cover.

6-32

I

rl
. .

'
I
.

2. Lift off the cover as shown.

3. Turn the headlamp housing socket to the left to
unlock the socket from the lamp housing.

6-33

4. Remove the headlamp housing socket.

6-34

5 . After removing th'e wiring harness from the
headlamp housing socket. replacethe bulb and
socket. Reconnect it to the wiring harness and
reinstall the headlamp housing socket back into the
headlamp assembly.

Front Turn Signal Lamps
1. The turn signal lamps are located on the outboard
side of the headlamps. To access, turn the lock tabs
on the headlamp cover in the direction of the arrows
and then lift off the cover (see Steps 1 and 2 under

"Headlamps").

r

.C

-

. .

.

h

3. Remove the tuin signal lamp housing socket and
replace the bulb.

2. Turn the housing socket to the right to unlock the
socket from the lamp housing.

6-35

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)

1. Lift the trim cover to remove.
2. Twist the socket to the left and remove the socket
and bulb from the housing.

6-36

Reverse the steps to reassemble the stoplamp assembly.

P

Rear Turn Signal Lamps and Taillamps
1. Open the trunk to gain access tothe lamp housing.

A

-!

5 . Press the bulb housing lever and rotate the housing
to the left toremove it. To remove the bulb, push and
rotate it to the left.
P

2. Remove the convenience net and pull the trim away
to access the wing nuts.

Once you have replaced the burned-out bulb, reverse the
steps to reassemble the lamp assembly.

3. Remove the two wing nuts.
4. Gently remove the lamp housing.

6-37

Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement
It’s a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade
assembly on a regular basis or when worn. For proper
windshield wiper blade length and type, see “Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts” later in this section.
To replace the wiper blade assembly:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACCESSORY and turn the
wipers on. Position the wipers on the windshield in
the “mid” wipe position. Then with the door open,
turn the key to OFF.

2. Insert a screwdriver intothe slot as shown and press
down to release the wiper blade assembly.
3. Align the wiper arm pin with the hole on the wiper
blade assembly and snap it into place to install.

Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see
your Cadillac Warranty booklet for details.

6-38

r
r
!

rI

r
r

A CAUTION:
~~

~~

Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
0 Overloading your tires can cause overheating
as a result of too much friction.You could have
an air-outand a serious accident. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” h the Index.
0 UnderinfJated tires pose the same danger as
overloaded tires.The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all
tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
0 Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
CAUTION: (Continued)

--

I

r
It-

CAUTION: (Continued)
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn,or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
See “Inflation Tire Pressure” in this section
for inflation pressure adjustment forhigher
speed driving.

--

Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Tire-Loading Information label,which is located
on the rear edgeof the driver’s door, shows the correct
inflation pressures foryour tires when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle hasbeen sitting for at least
three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

If you’ll be driving at speeds higherthan 100 mph
(160 km/h) where it is legal, raise the cold inflation
pressure of each tire to 35 psi (240 kPa). When you end
this very high-speed driving, reducethe cold inflation
pressures to those listed on the Tire-Loading
Information label.

6-39

When to Check

NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell youthat underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. Ifyour tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can
get the following:
Too much flexing
Too much heat
0 Tire overloading
0 Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy.
If your tires have toomuch air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
Unusual wear
Bad handling
0 Rough ride
0 Needless damagefrom road hazards.

Check your tiresonce a month or more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at 60
psi (420 Wa).

How to Check

a

Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tiresmay look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the
valve caps backon the valve
stems. Theyhelp prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.

Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should berotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
( 10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and
check wheel alignment. Also check fordamaged
tires or wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires”
and “Wheel Replacement” later in this section for
more information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Maintenance Schedule
booklet for scheduled rotation intervals.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire-Loading
Information label. Make certain that all wheel nuts
are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in
the Index.

I A CAUTION:

When rotating your tires, always use the correct
rotation pattern shown here.

Rust or dirton a wheel, or on the partsto which
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could comeoff and cause
an accident. When you change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt
from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be
sure to use a scraper orwire brush later, if you
need to, to get all the rust ordirt off. (See
“Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.)

Don’t include the compact spare tire in your
tire rotation.

6-41

When It’s Time for New Tires
~

One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:

You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s
rubber.
0

The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep
enough to show cord or fabric.

6-42

The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or location
of the damage.

Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look
at the Tire-Loading Information label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling,speed rating,
traction, ride and other things duringnormal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an ”MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replaceyour tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and consiruction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

I A CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial andbias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could havea crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same
size and type tires on all wheels.
It’s all right to drive with your compact spare,
though. It was developed for use on your vehicle.

A CAUTION:

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The following informationrelates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear. traction and temperature performance.
(This appliesonly to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread,winter-type snow
tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the

wheel rim flanges could developcracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could
fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

6-43

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a
half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course
as a tiregraded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

-- A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areA, B,
and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased
on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not
include cornering (turning) traction.

Temperature

-- A, B, C

The temperature gradesare A (the highest),B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of

6-44

heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
B and A represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for atire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separatelyor in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not
needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.

Wheel Replacement
~ e p l a c any
e wheel that is bent. cracked, or badly ruslea
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). Seeyour
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity. diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts. replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your
Cadillac model.

A CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle canbe
dangerous. It could affectthe braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have a
collision in which youor others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel boltsand
wheel nuts forreplacement.

NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometeror
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more
information.

6-45

Used Replacement Wheels

A CAUTION:
~

~

~~

NOTICE:

~~

Putting aused wheel on your vehicleis
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s beenused o r
how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
If you have to replacea
and cause an accident.
wheel, usea new GM original equipmentwheel.

6-46

Tire Chains

Use tire chainsonly where legal andonly when
you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains
that are the proper
size for yourtires. Install
them on the front tires and tighten them as
tightly as possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions.If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues,slow down until it
or spinning thewheels
stops. Driving too fast
with chains on will damage your vehicle.

Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others canburst into flameif you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
vehicle. be sure to followthe manufacturer‘s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to cleanyour vehicle:

Gasoline
0

Benzene
Naphtha

0

Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone

0

PaintThinner

0

Turpentine

0

LacquerThinner

0

Nail PolishRemover

They can all be hazardous -- some more than others -and they can all damage your vehicle, too.

Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses: these will damage your vehicle:
0

0

Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents

Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean, damp cloth.
Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot and Soil
Remover. They will clean normal spots and stains very
well. You can get GM-approved cleaning products from
your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in
the Index.)
Here are some cleaning tips:
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
0 Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area
often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn.
0 If a ring forms after spot cleaning, cleanthe entire
area immediately or it will set.

6-47

Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner
on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.

2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.

3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on
the container label to form thick suds.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don’t
saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly.

5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section,use a sponge
to remove the suds.

6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.

Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine
and blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.

2. If a stain remains, follow the multi-purpose interior
cleaner instructions described earlier.

6-48

3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a waterhaking soda solution:
1 teaspoon ( 5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.

2. First, clean with cool water and allow to dry
completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for
Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner.

Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do it more than once.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain
if you don‘t getthem off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for
this product,

Cleaning Leather

Cleaning Wood Panels

Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap

Use a clean clothmoistened in warm. soapy water (use
mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.

or saddle soapand wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
For stubborn stains. use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.

Cleaning Speaker Covers

0

Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish orshoe polish on leather.

Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker won't be damaged. Clean spots with just water
and mild soap.

0

Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.

Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.

Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflectionsin the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.

Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft
cloth or sponge. Commercial cleanersmay affect the
surface finish.

-

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.If you do, it
may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and
lukewarm water.

6-49

Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass shouldbe cleaned often.GM Glass Cleaner(GM
Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner
will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust filmson
interior glass.
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
cause scratches.Avoid placing decals onthe inside rear
window, since they may have tobe scraped off later. If
abrasive cleaners are usedon the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger elementmay be damaged.
Any temporary license shouldnot be attached acrossthe
defogger grid.

Cleaning the Outsideof the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running,
wax, sap orother material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outsideof the windshield with GM Windshield
Cleaner, Bon
Powder (non-scratching glass
cleaning powder), GM Part No. 105001.1. The windshield
is cleanif beads do not form when you rinse it with water.
A

6-50

m

i

@

Grime fromthe windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and atfat their performance. Clean the bladeby wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.

Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick orsqueak.
Apply silicone greasewith a cleancloth at least
every six months. During very cold, dampweather
more frequent applicationmay be required. (See
“Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants” in the
Maintenance Schedule booklet.)

Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retentionand durability.

Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
keep itclean by washing it oftenwith lukewarm or
cold water.

1
f

Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Don’t use strong soaps orchemical detergents. Use
liquid hand, dish or carwashing (mild detergent) soaps.
You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your
dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the
Index.) Don’t use cleaning agentsthat are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives.
All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to
dry on the surface, orthey could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or
an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratchesand water spotting.
High pressure carwashes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior LampdLenses
Use lukewarm or coldwater, a soft cloth and a liquid
hand, dish or carwashing (mild detergent) soapto clean
exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under
“Washing Your Vehicle.”

Finish Care
Occasional waxmg or mild polishing or your vehicle
by hand may be necessary to remove residue fromthe
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning
products from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care
and Materials” in the Index.)

Your vehicle has a “ b a ~ e c ~ a t l c l e a r cpaint
~ a t ~ ~finish.
The clearcoat givesmore depth and gloss to the
colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes
that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoatlclearcoat
paint finish.

NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on
a basecoatlclearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice meltingdgents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicalsfrom industrial chimneys, etc.,can
damage your vehicle‘s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleanersthat are marked
safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subjectto aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over aperiod
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.

6-51

Cleaning Aluminumor Chrome
Wheels (If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A
wax may then beapplied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or
abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could
damage the surface. You may use chrome polish on
chrome wheels, but avoid any painted surface of the
wheel, and buff off immediately after application.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic carwash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes canalso damage the surface of these wheels.

Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.

I NOTICE:
When applyinga tire dressing always take care
to wipeoff any oversprayor splash from all
of the
painted surfaces on the body or wheels
vehicle. Petroleum-based productsmay damage
the paint finish.

Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement,make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore cofrosion protection.

Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches
in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials availablefrom your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areasof finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.

I

Underbody Maintenance

Chemical Paint Spotting

Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collecton the underbody. If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust)can occur on
the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor
pan and exhaust system even though they have
corrosion protection.

Some weather and atmospheric conditionscan create
a chemical fallout, Airborne pollutants can fall upon
and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This
damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregulardark spots etched
into the paint surface.

At least every spring, flush these materials
from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do
this for you.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Cadillac
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.

6-53

Appearance Care Materials Chart
I PART NUMBER I

I

DESCRIPTION
Polishing Cloth- Wax Treated
Tar and Road Oil Remover
Chrome Cleaner and Polish
White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Wash Wax Concentrate

994954
1050172
1050173
1050174
1050214
32
1050427
1052870

SIZE
23 in. x 25 in.
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (,0.473L)
oz. (0.946 L)
23 oz. (0.680 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)

1052918""

8 02. (0.237 L)

Armor
All

1052925

16 oz. (0.473 L)

Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner

6-54

TM

Protectant

I

I

USAGE

Exterior polishing cloth
Removes tar, road oil and asphalt
Use on chrome. stainless steel. nickel, copper and brass
Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls
Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops
Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints
Cleans and lightly waxes
Protects leather. wood. acrylics, Plexiglas , plastic.
rubber and vinyl
Cleans carpets. seats, interior trim,
door panels
and floor mats
lh1

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and
special equipment.

1 I111111111111111111111111111111II111111111111Ill1
SAMPLE4UXWM072675
111

Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

f1
ASSEMBLY

ENGINE A
9
8
CODE
MODEL YEAR
A

PLANT

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle.It appears on
a plate in the front comer of the instrument panel. on the
driver‘s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VTN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.

Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine. specifications
and replacement parts.

Electrical System
Add-on Electrical Equipment

I NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electricalto your vehicle
unless you check with yourdealer first. Some
electrical equipmentcan damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other componentsfrom working as
they should.

Service Parts IdentificationLabel
You‘ll find this label on the rear wall of the trunk on
the passenger’s side. It’s very helpful if you ever need
to order parts.On this label is:
0

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.

your VIN,

6-55

Headlamp Wiring

MaxiFusesmelay Center

The headlamp wiring has an individual fusewhich is
powered by a MaxiFuse@.An electrical overload
will cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some
cases to remain off. If this happens, havethe headlamp
wiring checked right away.

The MaxiFusesand relays are located next to the engine
compartment fuseblock on the driver's side of the
engine. To access the compartment fuse block, remove
the shroud,cover. If a MaxiFuseshould blow, have your
vehicle servicedby your dealerimmediately.

MaxiFuse is aregistered trademark of Little
Fuse Incorporated.

Windshield WiperFuses
The windshield wiper motor is powered by a MaxiFuse.
If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc.,the
wipers will stop until the motor cools. If the overload
is caused by some electrical problem, be sure to have
it fixed.
RELAY CENTER IDENTIFICATION

Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is
too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.

W
(N
IDOWS)
RELAY

91

Fuse

Usage

Fuse

BODY 1

Road Sensing Suspension (RSS) Fuse
(ETC Only), Convenience Fuse, BATT
Fuse, Antenna Fuse, Passenger and
Driver Seat Belt Comfort Solenoids,
Trunk and Fuel Door Release
Solenoids and Relays, Door
Lock/Unlock Relays, Damper Relay
(ETC Only), Parking LampRelay,
Right and LeftPark Fuse, Rear Fog
Lamp Relay (Export)

INADVERT Inadvertent Power Relay, Interior
Lamps Fuse, CigaretteLighter- 1 Fuse,
Courtesy Lamp Relay

BODY 2

BODY 3

Defog Relay, Pull-Down Fuse, Right
and Left Heated Seat Fuse, Electronic
Level Control (ELC) Fusemelay,
Antenna Fuse,Heated Mirror Fuse,
Heated Backlite Fuse, Electronic Level,
Control Breaker
Controlled Power Relay, Controlled
Power Back-up Relay, Cluster Fuse,
Platform Zone Module (PZM) Fuse,
Radio Fuse, DAB Relay, Trunk and
Fuel Door ReleaseRelay, High-Beam
Relay, Comfort Fuse,AMP (Bose
Only) Fuse, Rightand Left Bose Relay

Usage

LAMPS

Headlamps Fusemelay, High/Low
Beam Control Relay, Fog Lamp Fuse,
DlU Fuse, Hazard Fuse, Mirror Fuse,
Inadvertent PowerRelay, Right and
Left High-Beam Fuse, Rightand Left
Low-Beam Fuse, Stop Fuse, Fog Lamp
Relay, DRL Relay

IGN 1

Rear Ignition- 1 Relay, Wiper Fuse,
Relay Ignition- 1 Fuse, Supplemental
Inflatable Restraint (SIR) Fuse,
Accessory Relay

WINDOWS

Delayed Accessory Bus (DAB) Relay

SEATS

Horn Relay, Driver and Passenger
Lumbar IdOut Relays, Driverand
Passenger Up/Down Relays

BATT 3

Steering Column Ignition Switch

BATT 2

Steering Column Ignition Switch

6-57

Fuse

Usage

Fuses and Circuit Breakers

IGN 1”

Front and Rear Ignition- 1 Relay,
Oxygen Sensor 1 and 2 Fuse, Fuel
Fuse, Cruise Fuse, DFU Relay, Front
and Rear Fog Lamp Relay, Control
Power Back-up Relay, Ignition- 1 Fuse,
Fuel Pump Relay

The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.

BATT 1

Starter Relay and Solenoid, ParldXev
Fuse, Park Relay, PCM Fuse, AC
Compressor Fuse and Relay, Fan
Relays, Reverse Relay

BRAKES

ABS Brake Modulator

COOL FNS

Cooling Fan Relays 1 and 3

* Do not alter OBD I1 related fuses

6-58

orcircuit breakers.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the same
amperage. Pick some featureof your vehicle that
you can get along without -- like the radio or
cigarette lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the engine
compartment fuse block and the rear compartment
fuse block.

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

COR LPS

INT LPS

CIG LTRl

nnnnn

,

HDLPS

II

HAZARD

IGh O(ENG)

,

I

STOP

,

I

MIRROR

II

DRL
WIPERS

,

FUSE CENTER IDENTIFICATION
A X COMP

PCM(BAT)

PARK/REV

n
n
n
AIC COMP
RELAY

. ...
. I

,

A

The fuse block is located next to the air cleaner on the
driver’s sideof the engine. Liftthe cover to gain access.

uuu

- --ECS

PCM(IGN)

DIS

CRUISE

INJ

INJ

nnn

Fuse

Usage

COR LPS

Cornering Lamp Switch,Right and
Left Cornering Lamps

INT LPS

Trunk Lamp, Courtesy Lamps,
Front Vanity Lamps, Glove Box
Lamp, Garage Door Opener,
Courtesy Lamp Relay

6-59

Fuse

Usage

Fuse

Usage

CIG LTR1

Front and Rear Cigarette Lighters
(Full Console Only)

STOP

L HDLP LO

Left Low-Beam Headlamp

R HDLP LO

Right Low-Beam Headlamp

L HDLP HI

Left High-Beam Headlamp

Stoplamp Switch, Centered
High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL),
Turn Hazard Switch, ABS
Controller, Stepper Motor Cruise
Control, Right and Left Rear
Stoplamps (Export)

R HDLP HI

Right High-Beam Headlamp

MIRROR

FOG

Front Fog Lamp Relay, Right and
Left Front FogLamps

Inadvertent Power Relay, Left
Outside Rearview Mirror Switch,
ALDL, Memory Mirror Module
Dimmer Switch, Cluster

HDLPS

Headlamp Relay, High/Low-Beam
Control Relay, Right and Left
Low/High-Beam Fuses

DRL

Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
Relay, Left and Right Low Beam in
DHL Mode, DRL Switch

HAZARD

Electronic FlasherModule,
Turn/Hazard Switch, Right and Left
Front Turn Lamps, Right and Left
Rear Turn Lamps, Right and Left
Repeater Lamps (Export), Cluster

IGN 0 (ENG)*

Powertrain Control Module (PCM)

ABS

Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS)/Traction Control System

IGN- 1

Rear Ignition- 1Relay, Front Fog
Lamp Relay, Rear Fog Lamp Relay
(Export), ControlledPower Power
Relay, DRL Relay

6-60

Fuse

Usage

Fuse

Usage

WIPERS

Accessory Relay, Wiper Switch

DIS *

Electronic Ignition Control Module

A/C COMP

AC Compressor Relay, Cooling Fan
Relays I , 2.3, Compressor Clutch

CRUISE

PCM (BAT)*

PCM

Stepper Motor Cruise Control,
Power Steering Pressure Switch,
Low Refrigerant Pressure Cutoff
Switch, Park Relay

PARWREV

TCC and Exterior Travel Brake
Switch, Reverse Relay, Right and
Left Back-up Lamps,
Electrochromic Mirror (in Header).
Park Relay, Brake TransaxleShift Interlock (BTSI) Switch,
BTSI, PZM

INJ*

Injectors 1,4. 6, 7

INJ*

Injectors 2. 3. 5 , 8

FUEL PUMP*

PCM, Fuel Pump Relay, Fuel Pump

OXY SEN1*

Oxygen Sensor Front, CAT Front
Oxygen Sensor

OXY SEN2*

*OxygenSensor Rear.
Catalytic Converter (CAT)
Rear Oxygen Sensor

ECS*

PCM (IGN)*

Transaxle Shift Solenoids,Mass
Aifflow, Canister Purge, PCM,
Linear Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR), Front Ignition- 1 Relay,
Torque Converter

* Do not alter OBD I1 related fuses o r circuit breakers.

Powertrain Control Module (PCM)

6-61

Rear Compartment Fuse Block

Fuse

Usage

The fuse block is located on the front wall of the trunk
(behind the rear seat)on the driver’s side.Loosen the
four trunk trim fasteners and pull the trim away from the
fuse block to gain access.

RSS

Road Sensing Suspension (RSS)
(ETC Only)

1

RLY IGN 1

ELC

SIR

nIGN 0-BODY ~
COMFORT
~~~

0HTO BACKLT
0
ANTENNA
RSS

,,

Fuse

,

HTD MIR
lCONVENCl

TU:

: ; : OC

nRADIO’PHONE n
CLJSTER

~
HTD SEAT R
HTD SEAT L
~
B A n I I RSS

,

PULL DOWN

,,

RT PARK

I

~
~
I LT PPRK

,

RLY IGNl*

Usage
Cluster, Cruisein Stalk, PZM

SIR

SDM

ELC

Electronic Level Control (ELC)
Relay, ELC (AC)Compressor

TURN

Electronic Flasher,
Turn/Hazard Switch

CONSOLE

Rear Zone Blower, Right and Left
Heated Seat Switches (Optional)

6-62

PRNDL, PZM, Cluster, Air
Control Module (ACM), Upper
Zone Motor, Lower Zone Motor
(Optional), HVAC Solenoids,
Climate Control
Panel Analog
~
n
~
Shift Only),Rear 0
0 Cluster (Console
~
Relay
~ Defog Relay, ELC
0
0

IGN 0-BODY

COMFORT

CD Player, Remote Keyless Entry
( R E ) , Controlled Power Relay,
Air Control Module (ACM), PZM

AMP (Bose
Only) (Optional)

Right and Left Hand Bose Relay,
Right and Left Front Speakers (On
Door), Right and Left Rear
Speakers, BoseAmplifier

PZM

PZM

RADIOmHONE

Radio Receiver, Radio Interface
Module (RIM) (Bose Only),
Phone. DAB Relay, Trunk Release
Relay. Fuel Door Release Relay,
HighLow-Beam Relay

Fuse

Usage

Fuse

Usage

CLUSTER

Steering Wheel Controls, Cluster

BATT

ACC

PZM, Electrochromic Mirror,
Rain Sensor (Optionalj.
Accessory Relay

Driver and Passenger Seat Lumbar
Switch (Optionaljl. Driver and
Passenger SeatBelt Comfort
Solenoid, Memory Seat Module

HTD BACKLT

Rear Window Defog

RSS

CV-RTD (CV-RSS) (ETC Only)

HTD MIR

Right and Left Outside
Heated Mirror

RT PARK

HTD SEAT R

Passenger Heated Seat
Relay (Optional)

HTD SEAT'L

Driver Heated Seat Relay
(Optional)

Headlamp Switch, Right Front
Parking Lamp, Right Frontand
Rear Sidemarker Lamps, Right
Park Position Lamp(Export),
Right Turn/Stop/TTail Lamps, Rear
Fog Lamp Relay (Export), Right
and Left Rear Fog Lamps (Export)

PULL DOWN

Trunk Pull-Down Motor

LT PARK

ANTENNA

Power Mast Antenna

RSS

Road Sensing Suspension Module
(ETC Only)

CONVENC

Trunk Release Relay. Trunk
Release Solenoid, Fuel Door
Release Relay. Fuel Filler Door
Release Solenoid, Door Lock
Relay, Left Front Door Motors,
PZM, Door Unlock Relay

Left Frontand Rear Sidemarker
Lamps, Left Front Parking Lamp,
Left Park Position Lamp (Export),
Left Turn/Stopi'"ail Lamps, Right
and Left License Lamps,
Underhood Lamp

* Do not alter OBD I1 related

fusesor circuit breakers.

6-63

Replacement Bulbs
Application
Number
Headlamps Composite
Inner High Beam .......................
9005
Outer Low Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9006
Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2357 NA
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) . . . 1156
Rear Turn Signal and Taillamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2057

Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications
Displacement . . . . . . . . . 279 cubic inches (4 565 cc)
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6L DOHC V8
VIN Engine Code
Eldorado . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Y
ETC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Horsepower
Eldorado . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 (bhp) @ 5600 rpm
205 (kWj @ 5600 rprn
ETC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 (bhp) @ 6000 rpm
224 (kWj @ 6000 rpm

6-64

Torque
Eldorado . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 (lb-ft) @ 4000 rpm
407 (N-m)@ 4000 rpm
ETC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 (lb-ft) @ 4400 rpm
400 (N-m) @ 4400 rpm
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-7-3-4-5-6-8
Thermostat Starts To Open . . 177-184°F (81-85°C)
Capacities
Transaxle (4T80-E) . . . . . . . . . . 15 quarts (14.2 Lj
Crankcase (Engine Oil
with Filter Change) . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 quarts (7.1 L)
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . . . 12.5 quarts ( 1 1.8 L)
Fuel Tank . . . . . . . :. . . . . . . . . . . 20 gallons (75.7 L)
R- 134a Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 lbs. (0.91 kg)
Vehicle Dimensions
Wheel Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 inches (274.3 cm)
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200.2 inches (508.6 cm)
Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53.6 inches ( 136.2 cm)
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75.5 inches (191.8 cmj
Front Tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60.9 inches (154.7 cm)

Rear Tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60.9 inches
(154.7 cm)
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 lb-ft
(140 N-m)

Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all air conditioning refrigerants arethe same.
If the air conditioningsystem in your vehicle needs
refrigerant, be sure the properrefrigerant is used. If
you’re not sure, ask your dealer.

Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Air Filter Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type A 1096C
Fuel Filter Element . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type GF-580
Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type PF-58
PCV Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type CV-774C
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type 41 -900
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type 131-66
Windshield Wiper Blade
(Pin Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 inches (56.5 ern)

6-65

6-66

,/=
--.
.\

Section 7 CustomerAssistanceInformation
Here you will find out how to contact Cadillac if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain service
publications and how to report any safety defects.

7-2
7-4

7-5
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-1 1

Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
Roadside Service
Roadside Service for the Hearing or
Speech Impaired
Gold Key Courtesy Transportation
Transportation Options
GM Participation in an Alternative Dispute
Resolution Program

7-12
7- 12
7-13
7-13
7-13

Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defectsto
General Motors
Ordering Service and Owner Publications
in Canada

7-1

Customer SatisfactionProcedure

t

.---

.

I

t

7-2

Cadillac
dealers have the facilities, trained technicians
and up-to-date information to promptly address any
concerns you may have. However, if a concern has not
been resolved to your complete satisfaction, takethe
following steps:

STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.

STEP TWO -- If after contacting amember of
dealership management. it appears your concern cannot
be resolved by the dealership without further help,
contact the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center.
24 hours a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada,
contact GM of Canada Customer Communication
Centre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
For help outside of the United States and Canada,
call the following numbers as appropriate:

In Mexico: (525) 625-3256

In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994
0

In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-75 1-4135
(English) or 1-800-75 1-4 136 (Spanish)

Inthe Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009
0

In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British
Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-01 22

0

In all other Caribbean countries: (809) 763- 1315

0

In other overseas locations, call GM Overseas
Distribution Corporation in Canada at:
(905) 644-4 1 1 2.

a In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

7-3

For prompt assistance, please have the following
information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
0

Your name, address, home and business
telephone numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at
the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
Nature of concern

We encourage you to call us so we can give your inquiry
prompt attention. However, if you wish to write
Cadillac, address your inquiry to:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 436004
Pontiac, MI 48343-6004

7-4

In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Refer to your Warrantyand Owner Assistance Information
booklet for addresses of GM Overseas offices.
When contacting Cadillac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved in the dealership, using
the dealer’s facilities, equipment and personnel. That is
why we suggest you follow Step Onefirst if you have
a concern.

Customer Assistance forText
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC. (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Roadside Service

Each technician travels with a specially equipped
service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac
parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
Cadillac Roadside Service can bereached by dialing
1-800-882-1 112,24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
This service is provided at no charge for any
warranty-covered situation and for a nominal charge
if the Cadillac is no longer under warranty. Roadside
Service is available only in the United States
and Canada.

TOLL-FREE HOTLINE

l=SOO-882-1112

Cadillac Owner Privileges

TM

Roadside Service provides several Cadillac
Owner Privileges at “no charge,” throughout
your 1998 Cadillac Warranty Period-- 48 months/
50,000 miles (80 000 km).
TM

Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is morethan an
auto club ortowing service. It provides every Cadillac
owner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac
advisor and. when appropriate, a Cadillactrained dealer
technician who can provide on-site service.

7-5

Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the
following situations:
Towing Service
Battery Jump Starting
Lock Out Assistance
Fuel Delivery
Flat Tire Change (Covers change only)

Trip Interruption -- If your trip is interrupted due
to a warranty failure, incidentalexpenses may be
reimbursed during the 48 months/50,000 miles
(80 000 km)warranty period. Items covered are
hotel, meals and rental car.

Roadside Service Availability
Wherever you drive in the United States or Canada,
an advisor is available to assistyou over the phone.
A dealer technician, if available, can travel to your
location within a 30 mile (50 k m ) radius, of a
participating Cadillac dealership.If beyond this radius,
we will arrange to have your car towed to the nearest
Cadillac dealership.

Reaching Roadside Service
Dial the toll-free Roadside Service number:
1-800-882- 1112. An experienced Roadside
Service Advisor will assist you and request the
following information:

0

0

A description of the problem
Name, home address, home telephone number
Location of your Cadillac and number you are
calling from
The model year, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), mileage and date of delivery

Roadside Servicefor the Hearing or
Speech Impaired
Roadside Service is prepared to assist owners who have
hearing difficulties or are speech impaired. Cadillachas
installed special telecommunication devices called Text
Telephone (TTY) in the Roadside Service Center.
Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or a
conventional teletypewritercan communicate with
Cadillac by dialing from the United States or Canada
1-800-833-CMCC -- daily. 24 hours.

7-7

d
Gold Key Courtesy Transportation
One of your Cadillac Owner Privileges is Gold Key
Courtesy Transportation. It is just onemore example of
Cadillac's commitment to provide the services you
expect and deserve as a Cadillacowner.

Our Cadillac DealerTechnician network is ready and
able to assist Cadillac customers atroadside.

Gold Key Courtesy Transportation helps you get where
you need to be when your Cadillac is in the dealership
for warranty service.*

In Canada, please consult your GM dealer for
information on Courtesy Transportation.

7-8

Transportation Options*

Miscellaneous Service:‘:

Warranty work can frequently be handled in one day,
but there is often noreason for you to wait at the
dealership. Cadillachelps minimize inconvenience
to you by providing several transportation options.
Depending on the circumstances,your dealership
can offer you one of the following options:

Should the situation necessitate making your own
arrangements, Gold Key Courtesy Transportation
provides forreimbursement of personally arranged
transportation such as cab fare, reasonablefuel expenses
for a rideprovided by another individual or a rental
vehicle obtained from an independent source.

Shuttle Service*

Your dealership can provide you with shuttle service to
get you to your destination with minimal interruption of
your daily schedule when your Cadillac is unavailable
due to a warranty repair.

Courtesy Vehicle”
For repairs that require your vehicle to be unavailable to
you for an extended period of time, your dealer may
arrange to provideyou with a courtesyvehicle from the
dealership, or one obtainedfrom a local rental agency.

*Some restrictions maJ7 apply. Please consdt your
Cadillac dealer concerning specific
Gold Key Courtesy
Transportation benefits offered by the dealership.

Plan Ahead When Possible

Whenever possible, schedulingan appointment for your
vehicle’s warranty service and advising your service
consultant that you wish to take advantage of Gold Key
Courtesy Transportation can help minimize your
inconvenience by allowing your dealer to prepare
arrangements to fulfill your transportation needs in
advance of your visit.

7-9

It is important that your vehicle be picked up from the
dealership promptly following the completion of your
You are responsible for primary insurance coverage of
repairs. If your vehicle is not picked up from the
the vehicle provided. In many cases, your own auto
dealership within a reasonable amount of time following
insurance policy may provide thiscoverage under
notification from the dealer, you may be responsible
provisions for rental car agreements. Please consult your
for any additional rental charges incurred as a result
insurance carrier tobe certain of what’s covered.
of this delay.
While your dealership will cover the rental expense of
For Canadian Vehicles
a vehicle provided under the provisionsof Gold Key
Courtesy Transportation, you are responsible for
In Canada, for warranty repairs during the Complete
charges incurred for such items as fuelused, additional
Vehicle Coverage period in the New Vehicle Limited
insurance coverage and any taxes or feeslevied by state
Warranty, interim transportation may be available under
or local governmental agencies.
the Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer fordetails.
Owner Responsibilities

7-10

GM Participation in an Alternative
Dispute Resolution Program
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Canadian owners refer toyour Warranty
and Owner Assistance Informationbooklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP). General Motors reserves the right to
change eligibility limitations and/or to discontinue
its
participation in this program.
Both Cadillac and your Cadillac dealer are committed to
making sure you are completely satisfied with your new
vehicle. Our experiencehas shown that, if a situation
arises where you feel your concern has not been
adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure described earlier in this section is
very successful.
There may be instances where an impartial third party
can assist in arriving at a solution to adisagreement
regarding vehicle repairsor interpretation of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these
disagreements, Cadillac voluntarily participates in BBB
AUTO LINE.

BBB AUTO LINE is an out-of-court program
administered by the Better Business Bureau system
to settle automotive disputes. This program is available
free of charge tocustomers who currently own or lease a
GM vehicle.

If you are not satisfied after following the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure, you may contact the BBB using
the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the
following address:
BBB AUTO LINE
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203- 1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5 100
To file a claim,you will be asked to provide your name
and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
and a statementof the nature of your complaint.
Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and
other factors.

7-11

We prefer you utilize the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure before you resort to AUTO LINE, but you
may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt
to resolve the complaint serving asan intermediary. If
this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will
be scheduled where eligible customers may present their
case to an impartial third-party arbitrator.
The arbitrator will make a decision which you may
accept or reject. If you accept the decision, GM will be
resolution
bound by that decision. The entire dispute
procedure should ordinarily takeabout 40 days from the
time you file a claim until a decision is made.

Some state laws may require you to use this program
before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration program
or in the courts. For further information,contact the
BBB at 1-800-955-5 100 or the Cadillac Customer
Assistance Center at1-800-458-8006.

Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separatewarranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could
cause a crash orcould cause injuryor death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington. D.C. area) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information aboutmotor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.

7-12

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE CANADIAN
GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect,you should immediately notify
Transport Canada. in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
Box 8880
Ottawa. Ontario K1G 352.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre. 163-005
I908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa. OntarioL 1H 8P7

Ordering Service andOwner
Publications in Canada
Service manuals. owner's manualsand other service
literature are availablefor purchase for all current and
past model General Motors vehicles,
The toll-free telephonenumber for ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.

In addition to notifyingNHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this,we certainly hope you'll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-458-8006 or write:
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 436004
Pontiac. MI 48343-6004

7-13

1998 CADILLAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing
of your vehicle can be purchased by filling
oui
the Service Publication Order Form
in this book and mailingit in with your check, money order,
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1998 CADILLAC
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $90.00

OWNER’S INFORMATION
Owner publications are written directly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about the
vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance
Schedule forall models.

TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
1998 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $40.00

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$15.00

SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Bulletins give technical service information needed
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THEORDER FORM SHOWN ON
THE FOLLOWING PAGE ANDMAIL TO:
Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$10.00

CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
Service Publications are available for current and past
model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please
specify year and model name of the vehicle.

OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA-MasterCarcCDiscover)

~

~~

~~~

ORDER TOLL FREE

19.
9

Orders will be mailed within10 days of receipt. Please allow ade uate time for postal
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)
service. If further information is needed, write to the address sllown below or call
1-800-782-4356
1-800-782-4356.Material
cannot
be
returned
for
credit
without
packing
slip
with
return
information within30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied
(Monday-Friday8:OO AM - 6:OO PM EST)
FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927
against
the
original
order.
VEHICLE MODEL
PUBLICATION FORM
PRICE
TOTAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION
YEAR
PRICE
NUM6ER
NAME
EACH*
Manual

Service
Car 8 Light Truck
Transmission Unit Repair
Owner's Manual In Portfolio

8I

s
i
I
3

Porffolio
Without
Manual
IOwner's

(STATE)

I

aP

A

5.00

c

0
0
0

MasterCard

~

I $10.00 I

TOTAL MATERIAL

Michigan Purchasers
I add 6% sales tax
, U.S. Order Processing

$5.00

Canadian Postage
(See Note Below)

-

GRAND TOTAL

Discover

~~

IC

(STREET ADDRESS-NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)

(CITY)

1-CAD-ORD98

1998

Check or Money
Order payable to
Helm, Inc. (USA funds
only do not send cash.)

VISA

(CUSTOMER'S
(ATTENTION)
NAME)

N
T

(ZIP CODE)

DAYTIME
TELEPHONE
NO.
CODE

$40.00

1 1998 1

NOTE: Dealersand Companiesplease provide dealer or company name, and also the
name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Mail completed order formto:
HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
For purchases outsideU.S.A. please write tothe above address for quotation.

~

r
>

$1

1998

0
AREA

"(Prices are subjectto change without noticeand without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)

I

Number:

Expiration
Date mo/yr:

m

Check hereif your billing address
is different from your shipping
address shown.
I

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed pricesare quoted in U S . funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payablein U.S. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add$11.50 plus the
US. order processing.

@% NOTES

7-16

...

Section 8 Index

ABS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle . . . . . . 6-3
AirBag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-20
1-24
How Does it Restrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How it Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1-22
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21.2-61
1-25
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-23
What Makes it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Will You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
When Should it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-23
6-15
Aircleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Air Conditioning Refrigerants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Air Control. Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3. 3-4
Alarm. Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 14
6-44
Alignment and Balance. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-52
Aluminum Wheels. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antenna. Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22. 6-23
Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64. 4-7
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Anti-Lockout Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Anti-Theft. Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Appearancecare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Appearance Care Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54

Apply Brake To Shift Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-71
7-11
Arbitration Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Armrest. Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.49.2.X
2-3
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-51
Assist Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Astroroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Audio Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3 ~
Audio Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3:
3-5
Audio Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1t
2-21
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-22
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-21
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-12
Automatic Pull-Down Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Charging System Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-?
No Charge Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Replacement, Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Volts High Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-72
2-72
Volts Low Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 5-5

BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-42
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-42
2-43
Inadvertent Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1 1
BBB Auto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Better Business Bureau Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 1
Blizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-28
Brake
6-30
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6-28
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-25
Parlung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-30
PedalTravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-31
Replacing System Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-62
System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-36
Transaxle Shift Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-28
6-30
Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BrakeVacuum Problem Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Brakes, Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4- 10
Break-In, NewVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-17
2-42
Brightness Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BTSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 8
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6-64
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.29.4.29. 4.35
Carbon Monoxide ....................
Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 12. 3. 15. 3.24
Cassette Tape Player Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

8-2

2-5 1
Cellular Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center Console Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-49
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Bulb Replacement . . . . 6-36
1-29
Center Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central Door Unlocking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4-35
Chains. Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-46
Chains.Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Engine Oil Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Change Trans Fluid Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Charging System Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Check Brake Fluid Level Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Check Coolant Level Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
2-73
Check Fuel Gage Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-73
Check Gas Cap Message .........................
2-73
Check Oil Level Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Washer Fluid Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-73
Checking Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
6-53
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-33
Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Securing in the Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
WheretoPut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-37
CHMSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-36
Chrome Wheels. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
6-58
Circuit Breakers and Fuses .......................
Cleaner. Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15

Cleaning
Alummum or Chrome Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
6-48
Fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-50
6-47
Inside of Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-49
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 49
6-50
Outside of Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speakercovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-49
Special Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.48.6.49
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Vinyl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
6-49
WoodPanels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Climate Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9
Climate Control Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climate Control Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Clock . Setting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Comfort Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Compact Disc Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-36
3-17. 3-26
Compact Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cornpact Disc Player Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 17. 3.26
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-34
Compass. Rearview Mirror with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Console Shift Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Continuous Variable - Road Sensing Suspension . . . . . . 2-84
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
2-48
Convex Outside Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.

6-22, 6-23
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
SurgeTank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-20
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
? .

Damage. Finish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-52
Damage. Sheet Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Daytime Running Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Dead Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Defects. Reporting Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 12. 7- 13
Defensive Driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Defogger.RearWindow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
DIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Digital Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Dimensions, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-64
Dolby B Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 3. 3- 16. 3-25
Door
Central Unlocking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
MapPocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
OpenMessage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Driver Door Open Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73

...

~

8-3

Driver Information Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-70
Driver Information Center Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 1
1-12
DriverPosition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver's Outside Auto-Dimming Rearview Mirror . . . . . 2-48
Driving
City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-2
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
Drunken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-21
Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-28
InaBlizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5
In the Rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-16
On Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4- 1 1
On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
On Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
On Snow and Ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Throughwater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-18
WetRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-25
With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-36
DRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-40
4-3
DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2

Ecc

.........................................
Electrical Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20. 3.35.
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrochromic Daymight Rearview Mirror . . . . . 2.44.
Electrcnic Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-4

3-2
6-55
6-55
2-45
3-2
4-3 I

Electronic Solar Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10
Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
6-22, 6-23
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-20
Coolant Hot-Idle Engine Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
2-65
Coolant Temperature Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Temperature Wdming Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-29
2-74
Hot -- A/C Off Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-55
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Misfire -- Ease Off Gas Pedal Message . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Overheated Stop Engine Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Power Reduced Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
2-30
Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Starting Your . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-19
Engineoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15
What Kind of Oil to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Whentochange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14
Engine Speed Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
EnglisNMetric Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4
Exhaust, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Express-Down Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-31
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

.

Fabric cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
FanButton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5
6-15
Filter.Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5 1
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
FirstGear. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Flashers. Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Flash-To-Pass Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
5-23
FlatTire. Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FloorMats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
2-41
FogLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foreign Countries. Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5..
French Language Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
Front Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9.5-1 1
Front Turn Signal Lamps . Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6- 3
Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-69
Door Lock Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6
Filling Your Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
2-69
Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Level Low Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-74
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-58
Gages
Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-65
2-69
2-59
2-60

GarmentHooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
GAWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-30
Gear Positions . Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
GloveBox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-49
Gold Key CourtesyTransportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Gross Vehicle Weight Ratlng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Guide en Franpis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
..
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
2-51
Handles. Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-39
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
HighLow Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Wiper Activated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Headlamps Suggested Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Hearing. Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-35
Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
1-4
Heatedseats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
High-Beam Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-24
4-35
Hitches, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood
Checking Things Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Hooks. Garment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-51
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-31
How to Reset the Oil Life Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 15
HVAC Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9
Hydraulic Brake Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-19
I c e Possible Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brightness Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CleaningtheTop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-75
2- 17
2-43
2-5 1
6-39
2-56
2-42
6-49
2 - 58
2-42

Jack. Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.26.5.27
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Keyless Entry System . Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Labels
4-30
Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-55
Tire-Loading Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-30
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55

8-6

Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-39
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-42
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Underhood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
1-6
Latches. Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leaving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-27
2-42
Light Sensor. Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Lights
Air Bag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.21.2.61
Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.64. .4.7_ Brake System W&ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-62
Charging System Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-62
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-68
2-63
Parking Brake Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Belt Reminder' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7.2-61
2-66
Service Engine Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64. 4-9
Loading YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
Anti-Lockout Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
PowerDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
Programmable Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 2-80
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
LockAJnlockConfirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-81
Low Refrigerant A/C Off Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Lumbar Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

.

Magnasteer mr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4- 1 o
Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Maintenance. Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-53
Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-66
MapPocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Matching Transmitters To Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
MaxiFuses/Relay Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Memory and Personalization Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Memory Seat and Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Mirrors
ConvexOutside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Driver's Outside Auto-Dimming Rearview . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Electrochromic Daymight Rearview . . . . . . . . . 2-44. 2-45
Illuminated Visor Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 1
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
2-47
Power Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4..
MMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
ModelReference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitored Systems OK Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
N e t . Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Neutral . Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nightvision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-50
2-23
2- 17
4-17

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer. Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-59
2-59

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
6-11
0il.Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Life Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-85
Oil Life Indicator. How to Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-68
Oil Pressure Low Stop Engine Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
OnStar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
2-75
Options Not Set Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overdrive. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2-49
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode . . . . . . . 5-15
5-15
Overheating Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Owner Publications. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 13. 7- 14
P a i n t Spotting. Chemical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-53
ParadeDimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Park
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-21
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Parking
AtNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-25
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-63
Brake Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-29
Over Things That Bum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Passenger's Side Temperature Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Passing . . (5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
2-16
PASS-Key IT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone Not Present Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75

8-7

Power
2- 18
Accessory. Retained ...........................
3-37
Antenna Mast Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DoorLocks ...................................
2-5
2-47
Remote Control Mirror ........................
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10
6-26
Steering Fluid ................................
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-31
Windows and Other Power Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Powerseat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
1-3
Lumbar Controls ..............................
1-3
Memory Function ..............................
Pregnancy, Use of Safety Belts ....................
1- 19
5- 1
Problems on the Road ............................
Program Pass Key Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . 2-5. 2-80
Publications, Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13, 7- 14
Pull-Down Feature, Automatic ....................
2- 12
R a d i o Personalization ..........................
3-32
Radio Reception ................................
3-34
Radio Theft-Deterrent Feature .....................
3-33
Radios .............................
3.10.3.13.3.18
Rain. Driving In ................................
4- 18
2-34
Rainsense Wipers ...............................
RAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-18
2-43
ReadingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear
Compartment Fuse Block .......................
6-62
Outside Seat Position ..........................
1-26
1-26
Seat Passengers ..............................

8-8

Storage Armrest ..............................
2-50
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.9.5.13
Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
Rear Turn Signal Lamps/ Taillamp Bulb Replacement . . 6-37
Rearview Mirrors ..........................
2.44.2.45
Recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
.........................
1-4
Reclining Front Seatbacks
6-65
Refrigerants.Air Conditioning ....................
Remote
6-6
Fuel Door Release .............................
2-6
Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-10
2-82
Remote Recall Memory ..........................
2-75
Remove Key Message ...........................
Replacement
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-64
6-65
Normal Maintenance Parts ......................
6-45
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-48
Replacing Safety Belts ............................
Reporting Safety Defects ....................
7- 12. 7-13
Restraints
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-48
Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-33
1-5
Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
2-18
Retained Accessory Power ........................
Reverse. Automatic Transaxle .....................
2-22
Right Front Passenger Position ....................
1-20
2-81
RKE Personalization Features .....................
Roadside Service ................................
7-5
Rocking YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Rotation.Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-40

1-48
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
6-49
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-29
Center Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-30
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1- 12
Driver Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-48
1- 12
How to Wear Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I
15,
1-46,
1-47
Incorrect Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-29
LapBelt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1- 12, 1-26
Lap-Shoulder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-45
Larger Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Questions and Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 1 1
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Rear Seat Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
1-7, 2-61
Reminder Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-48
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Shoulder Belt Tightness Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- I4
Smaller Children and Babies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30, 1-32
1- 19
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-8
WhyTheyWork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 12, 7- 13
Safety Warnings and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
Seatback
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Reclining Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
Seats
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Lumbar Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3

1-3
Memory Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1
1-2
Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing a Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.39. 1-4 1. 1-43
Second Gear. Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2.14.2.16
Security System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
A/C System Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
2-76
Air Bag System Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Fluid Switch Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Bulletins. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.13. 7. 14
Charging System Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-76
Electrical System Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Fuel System Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Idle System Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-76
713.
7.14
Manuals. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts IdentificatiomLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Publications. Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.13. 7.14
Ride System Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-76
Steering System Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-76
Transmission Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-76
Vehicle Soon Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Work. Doing Your Own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Service and Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Service and Owner Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13. 7.14
Service Stability System Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
2-26
ShiftLever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shift Lever Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

.

8-9

Shifting
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Into PARK (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Out of PARK (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Shoulder Belt Tightness Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Signaling Turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
SIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Skidding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Sound Equipment, Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Spare Tire, Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Speaker Covers, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Specificaticns and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Stability System Engaged Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Stains, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.48. 6.49
Starting Disabled Remove Key Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 2-19
Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
In Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Magnasteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Tips ...........................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Wheel, Tilt .....................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.3.33
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Storage Mode Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
SunVisors .......................
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Sunglasses Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
TM

8-10

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2- 52
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Surge Tank, Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
...
Surge Tank Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Symbols, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
x111
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
3-35
TapePlayerCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-51
Telephone. Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
2-15
Valet Lockout Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft System ProbledCar May Not Restart Message . . 2-77
Theft-Deterrent Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Third Gear, Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Tilt Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-32
Time, Setting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Tire Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-30
Tire-Loading Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-38
Alignment and Balance ........................
6-44
BuyingNew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
6-46
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ChangingaFlat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-24
6-52
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compactspare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-34
Inflation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-39
Inspection and Rotation ........................
6-40
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-30
Loading
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-39

Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
6-44
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-44
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-43
Uniform Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
6-42
When It's Time for New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-78
Top Speed Fuel Off Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-38
TopStrap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TorqueLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Torque, Wheel Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32.6-64
TowingaTrailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Towing YourVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Traction
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Control System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64, 4-9
EngagedMessage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-78
2-78
OffMessage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ready Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
2-78
Suspended Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-36
Driving on Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4-36
Driving with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-35
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance When Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-38
4-38
ParkingonHills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Tongueweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Total Weight on Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Turnsignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
3-33
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trans Fluid Reset Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Transaxle Fluid
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Transmission Hot Idle Engine Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Transmitter. Universal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Transmitters. Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Transportation. Gold Key Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-59
Trunk
Automatic Pull-Down Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
LockRelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
OpenMessage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-78
Storage System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-10
TrunkMounted CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-28
TTYUsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
2-32
Turn and Lane Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn Signal On Chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Turn Signal On Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-32.2-78
Turn SignalMultifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
2-41
Twilight Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-53
2-52

8-11

Valet Lockout Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 15
Vehicle
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Damage Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Speed Limited to XXX MPH (KM/Hj Message . . . . . 2-79
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Storage ......................
Overspeed Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Vehicle Speed Limit& . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Visors. Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
w a r n i n g Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Washer Fluid. Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50

8-12

Wheel
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
NutTorque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-32, 6-64
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26, 5-27
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-27
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-31
Express-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-35
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26, 2-35
Windshield Wipers, Rainsense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-34
Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-56
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
2-39
Wiper Activated Headlamps ......................
6-56
Wiring. Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wood Panels, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
WreckerTouring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Wrench, Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-26, 5-27

.

.....
.. . ... . . .. . . ... . . ... ..................
.. . . ............

. ...................................
. . . . . ...... ... ......... .. .

......

..........
...........
Taillirmps and Rear ,Tufa.siigmd&
2
0
5
~
..;.
....
',,c,"""."

~~~~~

..................................
. . . . ... ....
.. .p.,:.:.:.:.'..
.. . .. ... .....

.................

.....

.ij

r
r
P

r
r
1

25665433A
i



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.5-c012 1.149602, 2012/10/10-18:10:24
Format                          : application/pdf
Subject                         : Owner's Manual
Description                     : Owner's Manual
Modified                        : 2014:10:26 07:14:34-04:00
Creator                         : Creative Document Solutions, LLC.
Title                           : Owner's Manual
Size                            : 21607826
Author                          : Creative Document Solutions, LLC.
Extracted                       : 2014:10:17 12:21:17-04:00
Sha 1                           : a586209871b01c2861e9c0e697f8a0858af69feb
Modify Date                     : 2001:10:31 14:24:58-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2001:10:31 14:24:58-05:00
Create Date                     : 2001:10:20 05:27:31-04:00
Creator Tool                    : Acrobat Capture 3.0
Producer                        : Adobe PDF Library 4.0
Keywords                        : Owner's Manual
Style                           : Searchable Image (Exact)
Tags                            : OwnerCenter:GMNA/asset_type/owner_manual, OwnerCenter:GMNA/1998/cadillac/eldorado
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 380
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu